ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING
 
 BY THE SAME AUTHOR 
 
 A HANDBOOK ON PIPING 
 
 359 Pages 359 Illustrations 
 
 8 Folding Plates Postpaid, $4.00
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 A TEXTBOOK ON MECHANICAL 
 DRAWING AND MACHINE DRAWING 
 
 WITH 
 
 CHAPTERS AND PROBLEMS ON MATERIALS 
 
 STRESSES, MACHINE CONSTRUCTION AND 
 
 WEIGHT ESTIMATING 
 
 BY 
 
 CARL L. SVENSEN, B. S. 
 
 ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF ENGINEERING DRAWING IN THE OHIO STATE 
 
 UNIVERSITY, JR. MEM. A.S.M.E., MEM. S.P.E.E., FORMERLY INSTRUCTOR 
 
 IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING IN TUFTS COLLEGE AND HEAD 
 
 OF THE DEPARTMEMT OF MACHINE CONSTRUCTION 
 
 AT THE FRANKLIN UNION 
 
 SECOND PRINTING CORRECTED 
 
 NEW YORK 
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY 
 
 25 PARK PLACE 
 
 1919
 
 COPYRIGHT, IQl8, IQIQ. BY 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY 
 
 THE-PLIMPTON-PKESS 
 NOB WOOD-MA SS-U-S- A
 
 T 
 35} 
 
 
 DEDICATED TO THE AUTHORS FRIEND 
 
 GARDNEK. CHACE ANTHONY 
 
 WHOSE INFLUENCE AS AN ENGINEER. 
 
 AND TEACHER. ON THE DEVELOPMENT 
 
 OF AMERJCAN MECHANICAL DRAWING 
 
 IS UNIVERSALLY RECOGNIZED 
 
 mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm m
 
 <Wr;ML SCWOQl 
 
 MAflUAL *".rs 1*0 H<ie 
 
 MMFA KACtANA, CAUf 04MM 
 
 PREFACE 
 
 THE evening technical school has been rapidly developing 
 during recent years. From a makeshift it is coming to occupy 
 a field distinctly its own. The ambitious man attending an 
 evening technical school is fully the equal of his brother at the 
 day technical school and his worth is being increasingly realized. 
 
 The foundation subjects mathematics, mechanics, and draw- 
 ing require particular attention in evening courses, where the 
 time may be somewhat limited and the needs of the student 
 varied. This book has been prepared for Ohio Technical Draw- 
 ing School students as part of a technical course. 
 
 Progress in engineering work of any kind depends upon an 
 intimate knowledge of mechanical drafting as the language of 
 the engineering world. Its possibilities must be understood. 
 The mere drawing of lines and more or less copying of exercises 
 or sketching from a few models is far from the purpose of a draw- 
 ing course. The value of drawing as one of the working tools to 
 be treasured and used during a lifetime in the most useful of 
 professions, ENGINEERING, should be realized. It is as an aid in 
 the study, and later use of engineering knowledge, that drawing 
 finds its place. These preliminary remarks may serve to explain 
 the makeup of the book. 
 
 The actual handling of the instruments can best be taught 
 by careful individual instruction of each student, after which 
 false or awkward motions should be immediately corrected. 
 Inefficiency in this respect is one of the most severe handicaps of 
 many "self -made" draftsmen. The treatment of the various 
 subjects is necessarily somewhat brief, as it is intended that per- 
 sonal instruction should be given in each subject. 
 
 In the first studies the student is taught to represent each object 
 in strict conformity to the laws of projection. All lines are 
 drawn, all intersections are shown, and invisible surfaces are all
 
 viii PREFACE 
 
 indicated by dotted lines. For simple parts such drawings are 
 easily read and they are generally used in the drafting room. 
 When more complicated pieces are met with or where whole 
 machines or constructions are to be represented, such a method 
 would lead to great confusion and often would produce a drawing 
 which it would be almost impossible to read. The time nec- 
 essary would be very great even for an expert. In such cases 
 the full lines representing the visible surfaces are shown, but the 
 intersections and invisible surfaces are not all drawn in. The 
 selection of what lines to draw and what lines to leave out is an 
 important study in itself. 
 
 Furthermore there are many representations of parts which 
 are or appear to be violations of orthographic projection, which 
 are used because practice has shown that they convey the idea 
 to the workman more completely or easily. Other representa- 
 tions are used to save the draftsman's time, or in the interests 
 of simplicity. Almost anything which will make a drawing more 
 readily intelligible is justified. This statement must be used 
 with caution, as what will seem plain to a man familiar with the 
 work may not be so plain to the workman or other reader. 
 
 A drawing has one great purpose, and that is to be useful. 
 To this end lines may be added or left out, shading may be used, 
 or notes may be put on. As an expression in the engineering 
 language each drawing should have only one meaning, and 
 should state that meaning with the least possible chance for 
 misinterpretation. Many of these idiomatic expressions of the 
 engineering language will be considered in the later chapters. 
 
 The chapters on Materials and Stresses, Machine Construc- 
 tion, and Estimation of Weights are brief treatments of subjects 
 which are necessary for the making of intelligent drawings. Con- 
 siderable elementary machine design is included as belonging in 
 a practical treatment of mechanical drafting, for the author does 
 not look with favor upon fine distinctions between "subjects." 
 It is the "usability" which really counts. 
 
 The subjects are arranged to suit the author's convenience, 
 but they may be taken in a different order if desired. The 
 problems are placed in one chapter at the end of the book, so that 
 a selection may be easily made. These problems are suggestive, 
 and may be amplified by the teacher, who should make a free 
 use of actual shop blueprints and castings.
 
 PREFACE ix 
 
 The author believes that the highest grade work can be done 
 by evening school men, and in an experience of many years has 
 always found that they are ever ready to meet the most exacting 
 requirements when satisfied that what they are receiving is really 
 worth while. 
 
 Appreciation of the helpful criticisms of Prof. Thos. E. French 
 
 is here expressed. 
 
 CARL L. SVENSEN 
 COLUMBUS, OHIO, 
 Sept. 1, 1917.
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 PREFACE . . 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 DRAWING INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS 1 
 
 Instruments and Materials Use of the T Square and Triangles 
 Use of the Scale Drawing Pencils Use of the Compasses 
 Use of the Dividers Use of the Ruling Pen Character of Lines. 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 LETTERING 7 
 
 Lettering Gothic Letters Proportions and Forms Letter Spac- 
 ing Titles Bill of Material. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 CONSTRUCTIONS 13 
 
 Essential Constructions Angles Circles Plane Figures To 
 Bisect a Line To Bisect an Angle To Divide a Line into any 
 Number of Equal Parts To Copy an Angle To Construct a 
 Triangle, having given the Three Sides To Construct an Equi- 
 lateral Triangle To Construct a Regular Hexagon To Con- 
 struct a Regular Octogon To Draw an Arc of a Circle, having a 
 Given Radius, and Tangent to Two Given Lines To Draw a 
 Circle, Passing through any Three Points not in the same Straight 
 Line To find the Length of an Arc of a Circle To Draw a Tan- 
 gent to a Circle at any Given Point To Draw the Arc of a Circle 
 of given Radius, Tangent to an Arc and a Straight Line The 
 Ellipse To Draw an Ellipse by the Concentric Circle Method 
 To draw an Ellipse by the Trammel Method To Draw a Curve 
 having the Appearance of an Ellipse by Means of Circular Arcs 
 The Involute To Draw the Involute of a Triangle To Draw 
 the Involute of a Circle The Parabola To Draw an Equilateral 
 Hyperbola. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 PROJECTIONS 23 
 
 Purpose of Drawings Orthographic Projection The Planes of 
 Projection Some Rules Dotted Lines Auxiliary Views 
 Required Views The Imaginary Cutting Plane Representa- 
 tion of Cut Surfaces.
 
 xii CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 MATERIALS AND STRESSES 31 
 
 Materials Cast Iron White Iron Gray Iron Properties of 
 Cast Iron Wrought Iron Properties of Wrought Iron Steel 
 Bessemer Process Open Hearth Process Properties of Steel 
 Malleable Iron Suggestions for Selection of Material Loads 
 and Stresses Axial Stresses Unit Stresses Modulus of 
 Elasticity Ultimate Strength Factor of Safety Average 
 Values. 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 SCREW THREADS 40 
 
 Uses of Screw Threads The Helix Parts of a Screw Right- 
 and Left-hand Screws Forms of Screw Threads Multiple 
 Threads Split Nut and Square Thread Conventional Repre- 
 sentation of Screw Threads Threaded Holes Strength of 
 Screw Threads. 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 BOLTS AND SCREWS 48 
 
 U. S. Standard Bolts Bolts Studs Threaded Holes Machine 
 Screws Cap Screws Cap Nuts Set Screws Locking 
 Devices. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 RIVETING 57 
 
 Riveting Rivet Heads Lap Joints Butt Joints Calking 
 Miscellaneous Connections Rolled Steel Shapes. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 WORKING DRAWINGS 62 
 
 Classes of Drawings Special Detail Drawings How to Make a 
 Drawing Tracing Order for Inking Lines Assembly Draw- 
 ings Exceptions to True Projection Blueprints. 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 SECTIONS 71 
 
 Sectional Views Broken and Revolved Sections Location of 
 Sectional Views Objects not Sectioned Dotted Lines on Sec- 
 tional Views Sections of Ribs and Symmetrical Parts. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 DIMENSIONING 77 
 
 Purpose of Dimensions Dimension Lines Elements of Dimen- 
 sioning General Rules Systems of Dimensioning Location 
 of Dimensions Shafting Tapers Small Parts Methods of 
 Finishing Checking Drawings.
 
 CONTENTS xiii 
 
 >AOE 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 MACHINE CONSTRUCTION 87 
 
 Machine Operations Drills The Steam Engine Pistons 
 Sliding Bearings Wear and Pressure Stuffing Boxes Use- 
 ful Curves and Their Application Fillets and Rounds Arcs and 
 Straight Lines Flanged Projections Flange Edges Flanges 
 and Bolting Keys. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 SKETCHING 98 
 
 Uses of Sketching Materials for Sketching Making a Sketch 
 Taking Measurements Some Ideas on Sketching. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 
 ESTIMATION OP WEIGHTS 105 
 
 Accuracy Weights of Materials Weight of Loose Materials 
 Weight of Castings Methods of Calculation Weight of Cylin- 
 der Head Weight of Plunger Barrel Weight of Forgings. 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 PIPING 112 
 
 Piping Materials Pipe Fittings Standard Pipe Pipe Threads. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 INTERSECTIONS 117 
 
 The Line of Intersection Intersection of a Vertical Prism and a 
 Horizontal Prism Intersection of a Vertical Prism and an Inclined 
 Prism, Visibility of Points Intersecting Cylinders Choice of 
 Cutting Planes Connecting Rod Intersection. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 
 DEVELOPMENTS 123 
 
 Surfaces Development of a Prism Development of a Cylinder 
 Development of a Pyramid The Development of a Cone De- 
 velopment of a Transition Piece. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 PICTURE DRAWING 130 
 
 Isometric Drawing Isometric and Non-Isometric Lines Angles 
 Positions of the Axes Construction for Circles Oblique 
 Drawing.
 
 xiv CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 
 SHADE LINE DRAWINGS 136 
 
 Shade Lines System in Common Use Surface Shading Shad- 
 ing Screw Threads and Gears Special Surface Representations 
 Patent Office Drawing. 
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 DRAWING QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 141 
 
 INDEX... 181
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DKAFTING 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 DRAWING INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS 
 
 Instruments and Materials. Drawing instruments and 
 materials should be selected with care, and under the guidance 
 of an experienced draftsman or teacher. The really necessary 
 equipment consists of the following: 
 
 Set of case instruments comprising: 
 
 6-inch compasses with fixed needle point leg, 
 
 removable pencil leg and removable pen leg, 
 
 5-inch dividers, 
 
 5-inch ruling pen, 
 
 Bow pencil, bow dividers, bow pen. 
 24-inch T square. 
 16 " X 20 " drawing board. 
 6-inch 45 triangle. 
 10-inch 30 X 60 triangle. 
 Irregular curve. 
 12-inch architect's scale. 
 One dozen thumb tacks. 
 2 H and 4 H or 6 H drawing pencils. 
 Drawing paper. 
 Erasive and cleaning rubbers. 
 Pencil pointer. 
 
 Black waterproof drawing ink. 
 Lettering pens and pen holder. 
 Pen wiper. 
 
 Use of the T Square and Triangle. The T square is used for 
 drawing horizontal lines, with the head always against the left- 
 hand edge of the board, Fig. 1. The upper edge of the T square 
 blade is always used, and lines are drawn from left to right. The 
 
 1
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 triangles are used for drawing all other lines. Vertical lines are 
 drawn by placing a triangle against the upper edge of the T 
 square and drawing upward along the vertical edge, which should 
 be placed toward the head of the T square, as shown in Fig. 2. 
 
 Use of the Scale. The scale is used for laying off distances. 
 Whenever practicable, drawings should be made full size. If a 
 
 Fig. I 
 
 reduced scale must be used to accommodate the size of paper, 
 choose one which will show the object clearly, and which will 
 not require great crowding of dimensions. For mechanical 
 drafting, the architect's open divided scale, shown in Fig. 3, is 
 most used. There are many forms, both flat and triangular in 
 section. The following divisions are in general use, 1 / s , 1 /i, 3 /s, 
 1 /z, 3 /4> 1> iVa, and 3 inches to the foot. The scale 3 " =1' means 
 that the drawing is one fourth the size of the object, or that each 
 
 Fig. 3 
 
 one fourth inch on the drawing represents 1 inch on the object. 
 In this case, the 3 inches is divided up into 12 parts, each of 
 which represents 1 inch. These parts are further divided to 
 represent quarter inches and other fractions. The double mark 
 (") following a figure means inch or inches; the single mark (') 
 means foot or feet. A common scale graduated to y 32 of an 
 inch may be used for many reductions. In such cases use the 
 half inch for an inch in drawing one half size; the quarter inch 
 for an inch in drawing one fourth size, etc. For half size one 
 sixteenth becomes one eighth, and similarly for other divisions.
 
 DRAWING INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS 3 
 
 Fig. 3 shows the distance 2 feet, &/2 inches, laid off with the 
 scale of 3" = 1'. 
 
 Drawing Pencils. It is necessary to have pencils of the 
 
 right degree of hardness and properly sharpened. For lettering, 
 
 Fig, 5 
 
 Fig. 6 
 
 figuring, laying out, etc., a long conical point should be used. 
 A 2 H pencil will be found satisfactory. For the drawing itself, 
 one 4 H pencil and one 6 H pencil, carefully sharpened, are needed. 
 After removing the wood, Fig. 4, the lead is made slightly conical, 
 Fig. 5, and then formed as in Fig. 6, using fine sandpaper or a 
 file. Fig. 7 shows enlarged side and front views of the lead. 
 
 Use of the Compasses. The compasses, Fig. 8, are used 
 for drawing large circles. The needle point should be adjusted 
 with the shoulder downward and so that the point extends about 
 VM inch beyond the pen point, Fig. 9. A 4 H or 6 H lead should 
 then be sharpened as for the drawing pencil, and placed in the 
 pencil leg. Remove the pen point from the compasses, insert
 
 4 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 the pencil leg, and fasten it. Then adjust the lead so that the 
 end of it is about Vw inch above the needle point, Fig. 10. The 
 joints in the legs are for the purpose of keeping the point and 
 pencil perpendicular to the paper. The compasses should be 
 operated with one hand (the right hand). The needle point 
 should be placed in the center, and the marking point revolved 
 clockwise. Once around is enough, starting at the point in- 
 dicated in Fig. 11. 
 
 The bow instruments are used for small circles and divisions. 
 The method of setting the points and using is the same as for 
 the large compasses and dividers. 
 
 Use of the. Dividers. The dividers are used for transferring 
 distances and for dividing lines. They should be handled with 
 
 Full Size 
 J 
 
 Fig. 12.' Fig. 13- 
 
 the right hand. When dividing a line, the points should be 
 revolved in alternate directions, as indicated in Fig. 12. To 
 divide a line into three parts, first set the dividers at a distance 
 estimated to be about one third. Try it, and if too short, increase 
 the distance between the divider points by one third of the re- 
 maining distance. If too long, decrease the distance between 
 the divider points by one third of the .distance which they extend 
 beyond the end of the line. Repeat the operation if necessary. 
 
 The Use of the Ruling Pen. The ruling pen is used for inking 
 the straight lines, after the pencil drawing is finished. Ink is 
 placed between the nibs of the pen by means of a quill which is 
 attached to the ink bottle stopper. Care should be taken to 
 prevent any ink from getting on the outside of the pen. The 
 proper amount of ink is shown in Fig. 13. The pen should be 
 held in a vertical position, and guided by the T square or triangle. 
 It may be inclined slightly in the direction of the line which is
 
 DRAWING INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS 5 
 
 being drawn, but the point must always be kept from the angle 
 formed by the paper and the guide. Do not hold the pen too 
 tightly, or press against the guide. Both nibs of the pen must 
 touch the paper. Frequent cleaning of the pen is necessary to 
 obtain good lines. The same methods apply to the compass 
 and bow pens. 
 
 Character of Lines. All pencil lines should be fine, clear, and 
 sharp. For most purposes continuous pencil lines may be used. 
 The character and weight of ink lines for use on drawings, may 
 be found by reference to Fig. 14. 
 
 A F 
 
 B G 
 
 C H 
 
 D J 
 
 E K 
 
 Fig. i '4-. 
 
 A . Full line for representing visible surfaces. 
 
 B. Dotted line used with A for representing invisible surfaces. 
 
 Dots about Vie inch long and very close together. 
 
 C. Center line very fine dot and dash. 
 
 D. Witness line short dashes. 
 
 E. Dimension line long dashes, or fine full line. D and E 
 
 are often made the same. 
 
 F. Fine line for shaded drawings. 
 
 G. Dotted line for shaded drawings. 
 
 H. Shade line for shaded drawings, about three times thick- 
 ness of fine line. 
 
 J. and K. for special purposes, representing conditions not 
 specified above. 
 
 When shade lines are not used, a fairly wide line should be 
 adopted as wearing better, and giving better blueprints. The 
 width of line will depend somewhat upon the drawing. Large 
 simple drawings require a wide line, while small intricate draw-
 
 6 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 ings necessitate narrower lines. Drawings which are large and 
 still have considerable detail in parts require more than one 
 width of line. An experienced draftsman will use wide lines 
 for the large and simple parts, reducing them for the complicated 
 places in such manner that the different widths of lines are not 
 noticeable. The student is cautioned to proceed slowly and 
 strive for a uniform width of line until experience teaches discre- 
 tion. 
 
 Center lines are drawn very fine, and are composed of dots 
 and dashes. All symmetrical pieces should have a center line. 
 All circles should have both horizontal and vertical center lines. 
 
 Much information concerning the many different kinds of 
 drawing devices used by draftsmen for saving time and other 
 purposes can be found in the catalogues of drawing material 
 companies.
 
 CHAPTER II 
 LETTERING 
 
 Lettering. The subject of lettering in connection with work- 
 ing drawings is of great importance. Neat, legible letters, made 
 free hand and with fair speed, are required. This chapter will 
 deal with such letters. Those who wish to pursue the subject 
 further should procure a good book on lettering, such as French 
 & Meiklejohn's "Essentials of Lettering," published by McGraw- 
 Hill Company, New York, or Daniels' "Freehand Lettering," 
 published by D. C. Heath & Company, Boston, Mass. Either of 
 these books may be obtained for $1.00. 
 
 Great care and continual practice are necessary to do good 
 lettering, but the appearance of neatness, the greater ease of 
 reading, and lessened liability of mistakes, make up for the extra 
 time and work. 
 
 Commercial Gothic Letters. Commercial gothic and lower 
 case letters or small letters are the forms most used by engineers 
 and draftsmen. These are shown in Fig. 15, with the proportions 
 and directions for drawing the various lines. The vertical capi- 
 tals and lower case letters are shown in Fig. 16. The same pro- 
 portions and order of strokes apply to the vertical letters. The 
 inclined letters should have a slope of about 3 to 8, as shown in 
 Fig. 17. Some draftsmen use the 60 slope, but this does not 
 give as pleasing a letter (Fig. 18). 
 
 In all cases very light pencil guide lines should be drawn to 
 limit the tops and bottoms of the letters. The size of the letters 
 is determined to some extent by the character of the work, but 
 for most drawings the capitals should be Vs inch high, and the 
 small letters about two thirds as high (Fig. 17). For penciling 
 use a 2 H pencil, with a well sharpened round point. For inking, 
 a ball point pen may be used for fairly large letters, and Gillotts 
 404 or 303 for small letters. The pen may be dipped into the 
 ink and the surplus shaken back into the bottle, or the quill 
 may be used as with the ruling pen. For good work, the pen 
 
 7
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 \<5\ 
 
 6 I U-5.P--J 
 
 ,\\f 
 
 i Vi 
 
 Utf^l 
 
 Q'& 
 
 &' "" 
 
 r ^ 3- 
 
 c d ejf g h 
 \k I m n op q r 
 \s t u v w x = y z 
 
 Fig. 15 
 
 point must be kept clean, requiring frequent wiping. The pen 
 point should be kept pointed toward the top of the paper. 
 
 Proportions and Forms. The proportions and shapes of the 
 various letters should be studied and drawn to a large scale. 
 For purposes of study, the letters are divided into groups. The 
 following points should be observed. Rounded letters, such as
 
 LETTERING 
 
 I LT H F E NM 
 Z YA K V-WX 
 O C G U "j D 
 B P R S I 2 3 
 4567898 
 abed efghij 
 klmnopqrs 
 t u v w x y z 
 
 Fig. 16 
 
 C, J, 0, Q, and S, may extend very slightly outside of the limiting 
 lines. Pointed letters, like A, V, and W, may have the point 
 extending very slightly above or below the guide lines. The 
 horizontal bar in the letters B, E, F, H, and R is very slightly 
 above the middle, and for the letter P it is very slightly below
 
 10 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 the middle of the vertical height. For the letter A the bar is 
 placed about one third the height of the letter. The letter W 
 is wider than it is high. The two outside strokes of the M are 
 parallel. 
 
 Letter Spacing. The spacing between the letters when 
 combined to form words will vary with different arrangements. 
 The only general rule which can be given is that the area between 
 
 Fig. /8 
 
 the letters should be about equal. A few illustrations will be 
 given, showing the positions of some combinations of letters. 
 When such letters as A and T, or A and V, are used, they should 
 in general be placed close together, as in Fig. 19. A few words 
 are shown in Fig. 20. In the lines marked WRONG the letters are 
 equal distances apart. In the lines marked RIGHT the letters 
 are spaced so that the areas between them are about equal. The 
 
 AT A 
 
 combination of letters in each word, or the combination of words 
 in a line, will determine the spacing of the letters. 
 
 Titles. The matter of titles for drawings is subject to great 
 variation. The titles for detail drawings may or may not con- 
 tain the name and location of the concern. The name of the 
 machine, its size and number, the names of the details, scale, 
 date, and names or initials of the draftsman and engineer, should 
 be given. An example is shown in Fig. 21. Assembly drawings 
 generally have more elaborate titles. Good titles cannot be 
 made by rule, though a few suggestions may be of assistance. 
 Jt is often advisable to center the lines composing the title. This
 
 LETTERING 
 
 11 
 
 RUN 
 
 RU 
 
 LAT 
 
 LAT 
 
 PA 
 
 PA 
 
 WRONG 
 
 RIGHT 
 
 WRONG 
 
 RIGHT 
 
 :R 
 
 R 
 
 WRONG 
 
 RIGHT 
 
 Fig. 20 
 
 may be done by counting from each end of each line toward the 
 center, and placing the middle letter or space on the center line. 
 The line can then be completed by working in opposite directions 
 from the center line. The important facts should be given due 
 
 500 GALLON 
 STEAM JACKETED KETTLE 
 
 SCALE l^ 
 DRAWN BY 
 TRACED BY W. E. 
 CHECKED BY C.S. 
 
 APPROVED 
 DATE Sept. /2. J9/7 
 ORDER NO. B-462 
 R EV I S E D Jan. 
 
 Draw. No. 4-C-145 
 
 Fig. 21
 
 12 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 prominence. This may be done by using large letters, by using 
 heavier or blacker letters, by wide spacing between letters, or 
 by using extended letters. The element of time should be con- 
 sidered in the selection of letters. In general, the title should 
 be placed in the lower right-hand corner of the drawing, and 
 
 
 
 
 OHIO TECHNICAL 
 DRAWING SCHOOL 
 COLUMBUS. OHIO. 
 
 CYLINDER FOR 
 4*5 VERT ENGINE 
 Fu/1 Size 
 
 Drawn by J. H 
 Traced by J f(. - 
 Approved by T^f"<f 
 Dote Sept. IS, 19 1 '7 
 
 rig. S2 
 
 may or may not be "boxed in" (Fig. 21). Some concerns use a 
 title extending across the end of the drawing, in which case it 
 forms a "record strip" (Fig. 22). 
 
 Bill of Material. A bill of material is often put upon each 
 detail drawing in connection with the title. Sometimes a separate 
 
 PART 
 No 
 
 NAME: OF PART 
 
 No 
 WANTED 
 
 MATERIAL 
 
 PATTERN 
 No. 
 
 1 
 
 Spind/e 
 
 / 
 
 Steel 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Spur Center 
 
 1 
 
 Steel 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Cap Screw 
 
 4 
 
 Steel 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Cone Set Screw 
 
 1 
 
 Steel 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 Box Pins 
 
 2 
 
 Steel 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 Thrust Screw 
 
 1 
 
 Steel 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 Clamp Screw 
 
 1 
 
 Steel 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 Box 
 
 3 
 
 Brass 
 
 K-4-5 
 
 9 
 
 Washer 
 
 1 
 
 Brass 
 
 W-/33 
 
 to 
 
 Thrust Check Nut 
 
 t 
 
 Steel 
 
 
 Fig. 23 
 
 sheet is made containing a list of drawings, material, number 
 required, pattern number, location, etc., for the entire machine 
 or construction. Both methods may be used together. The 
 advantages of a separate list are apparent in certain classes of 
 machines where some drawings are used for many different ma- 
 chines. Bolts, pins, keys, and similar small parts are often 
 given a number, which is used to designate them. The applica- 
 tion and uses of lists are so varied that they must be learned for 
 the company where one is employed. A material list is shown 
 in Fig. 23.
 
 CHAPTER III 
 CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 Essential Constructions. Geometry forms the basis of the 
 constructions used in the making of drawings. A knowledge of 
 some of the principles of geometry is therefore' essential. A 
 point indicates position in space. W-hen a point is moved it 
 
 Fbra//e/ Lines 
 
 rig. 25 
 
 Fig. 26 
 
 generates a line, which may be either straight or curved. A 
 surface may be formed by moving a line. A plane surface is one 
 which will contain two intersecting straight lines. Two straight 
 lines are said to be parallel when they are everywhere the same 
 distance apart (Fig. 24). 
 
 Angles. When two lines cross they form angles. The size 
 of the angle is determined by the 
 amount of opening between the 
 lines. The angle A, in Fig. 25, is 
 greater than the angle B. If the 
 lines are revolved about their in- 
 tersection, so that the angle A is 
 made equal to the angle B, then 
 both angles are called "right" 
 angles (Fig. 26). The angles C 
 and D are also right angles, so 
 that all four angles are equal. 
 As shown, each angle is one 
 fourth the way around the point of intersection. 
 
 13 
 
 F'g. 2 7 
 
 When a right
 
 14 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 angle is divided into 90 equal small angles, each of these small 
 angles is called a "degree." Then it takes 4 times 90, or 360, 
 degrees to go all the way around the point where the lines cross. 
 Circles. A circle is a curved line formed by moving one 
 point around another point and at a constant distance from it 
 (Fig. 27). The curved line is called the circumference. The 
 constant distance is called the radius, and the fixed point is called 
 
 Equilateral- A/I sides 
 
 Isosceles- Two 
 sides equal. 
 
 Scalene - All sides 
 different 
 
 Fig. 28 
 
 Right Triangle - One ong/e 
 is a right angle. 
 
 the center. Lines drawn from the circumference to the center 
 form angles, which are measured in degrees. Two lines crossing 
 each other at the center of the circle, and making equal angles 
 with each other, form four right angles, so that a circle is said to 
 contain 360 degrees (written 360). A piece of the circumference 
 is called an arc. Other features of a circle are indicated in 
 
 Fig. 27. The length of the circumference is equal to the diameter 
 times 3.1416. (3.1416 is called "pi," and is often written TT.) 
 
 Plane Figures. A plane figure made up of three lines is called 
 a triangle. There are several kinds of triangles (Fig. 28). All 
 three angles of any kind of a triangle, when added together, are 
 always equal to 180 degrees. The sides of the right triangle 
 have a very useful relation to each other, which is illustrated in 
 Fig. 28. If the length of each of the two sides is squared and 
 added together, the sum will be equal to the square of the length 
 of the hypotenuse; thus, in the figure, 
 
 or 
 
 (3) 2 +(4) 2 = (5) 2 
 9+16 =25
 
 CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 15 
 
 A plane figure made up of four lines is called a quadrilateral. 
 When the opposite sides are equal and parallel, the figure is 
 called a parallelogram. There are several kinds (Fig. 29.) 
 
 Other regular plain figures are shown in Fig. 30. 
 
 Solids may have almost any form. The names and appear- 
 ances of a number of solids are shown in Fig. 31. 
 
 There are many geometrical constructions which are of use in 
 
 Fig. 3O 
 
 mechanical drawing. Detailed instructions for the solution of 
 some of these problems follow. These problems should be studied 
 carefully and be fully understood. They should be worked out 
 with a very sharp pencil, fine lines, and extreme accuracy. 
 
 To bisect a Line. (To divide a line into two equal parts) : 
 Given the line AB (Fig. 32). Using points A and B as centers, 
 
 Righf Ob/ique Truncated Hexagonal Frustum of a Right Circular 
 
 Prism Prism Tr/anguJar Prism Pyramid 7r/angt//or Pyramid Can* 
 
 Fig. 31 
 
 and a radius greater than one half the length of the line, draw 
 the arcs 1 and 2. Through the points where these arcs cross 
 each other, draw the line CD, which will divide the line AB into 
 two equal parts. The lines CD and AB form right angles, and 
 are said to be perpendicular to each other. The steps used in 
 solving this problem are illustrated in Fig. 32. Any given line 
 is shown at a. At b is shown the given line and the arc of a circle 
 having a radius greater than one half the line, and its center at 
 the upper end of the line. At c another arc has been drawn, 
 having the same radius as before, but with its center at the lower 
 end of the line. At d a line has been drawn through the inter- 
 sections of the two arcs, dividing the given line into two equal 
 parts. It is not necessary to draw the whole of the arcs or the
 
 16 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 usual appearance of the completed 
 
 intersecting lines. The 
 problem is shown at e. 
 
 To bisect an Angle (Fig. 33). Given the angle AOB. With 
 as a center, and any radius, draw an arc intersecting the sides 
 of the angle in points 1 and 2. With points 1 and 2 as centers, 
 and a constant radius, draw arcs cutting each other at C. The 
 line OC will bisect the angle. 
 
 To divide a Line into Any Number of Equal Parts (Fig. 34). 
 
 Fig. 3 2 
 
 Given the line 5'B. It is required to divide the line into five 
 equal parts. From one end of the line draw another line, making 
 an angle with it, such as B5. On B5, using any convenient 
 setting of the dividers, step off five equal spaces. Join the end 
 of the last space with the end of the given line. Through points 
 4, 3, 2, and 1 draw lines parallel to 5, 5', intersecting the given 
 
 Fig.35 
 
 line at points 4', 3', 2', and 1'. The line 5' will then be divided 
 into five equal parts. 
 
 Another method of dividing a line is illustrated in Fig. 35. 
 From one end of the given line draw a perpendicular such as 
 5' A, using the triangle and T square. Next place the scale in 
 such a position that one end of any five equal divisions is at 
 point B, and the other is on the line &A. Mark opposite each 
 of the divisions, and through each mark draw a vertical line 
 intersecting the given line, which will then be divided into five 
 equal parts. 
 
 To copy an Angle (Fig. 36). Given the angle AOB. To con- 
 struct another angle equal to it. Draw a line A'O'. With as 
 a center and any radius, draw an arc cutting the sides of the
 
 CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 17 
 
 angle at 1 and C. With 0' as a center, and the same radius, 
 draw the arc 1'C". With 1' as a center, and a radius equal to 
 the chord 1C, draw an arc cutting the arc 1'C" at C'. Draw 
 C'O'. Angle A'O'B' will then be equal to the angle AOB. 
 
 To construct a Triangle, having given the Three Sides (Fig. 
 37). Given the three lines A, B, C. Draw line A', equal to line 
 
 Fig. 36 
 
 Fig. 37 
 
 Fig. 38 
 
 A, With 1 as a center, and a radius equal to line B, draw an arc. 
 With point 2 as a center, and a radius equal to line C, draw another 
 arc, cutting the first arc at point 3. Join point 3 with points 1 
 and 2, completing the required triangle. 
 
 To construct an Equilateral Triangle (Fig. 38). Given one side 
 of the triangle, A. Draw line 1-2, equal in length to line A. 
 
 Fig. 4-1 
 
 With 1 and 2 as centers, and radius equal to line A, draw arcs 
 intersecting at 3. Join point 3 with points 1 and 2, completing 
 the required triangle. 
 
 To construct a Regular Hexagon (Fig. 39). If the distance 
 across corners is given, draw a circle having a radius equal to 
 one half this distance. Draw the diameter 102. With points 
 1 and 2 as centers, and the same radius, draw arcs cutting the 
 circle at points 3, 5, 4, and 6. Join these points to complete the 
 required hexagon. It will be noted that the radius used as a 
 chord divides the circumference into six equal parts. The 30 X 
 60 triangle may be used to construct a hexagon. Explain how.
 
 18 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 To construct a Regular Octagon (Fig. 40). Given the square 
 1-2-3-4. With the corners of the square as centers, and a radius 
 equal to one half the diagonal, draw arcs cutting the sides of the 
 square. Join the points thus found, completing the required 
 octagon. An octagon may be constructed inside of a circle by 
 using the 45-degree triangle. Explain how. 
 
 To draw an Arc of a Circle, having a Given Radius, and tangent 
 to Two Given Lines (Fig 41). Given the lines AB and BC and 
 
 Fig. 4-4 
 
 the radius R. Draw DE parallel to BC, and at a distance equal 
 to R from it. Draw FG parallel to AB, and at a distance equal 
 to R from it. Where DE and FG cross, gives point 0, the center 
 of the required arc. 
 
 To draw a Circle, Passing through Any Three Points (not in the 
 Same Straight Line) (Fig. 42). Given points A, B, and C. Draw 
 lines AB and BC. Bisect lines AB and BC, using the construc- 
 tion of Fig. 32. Where the bisecting lines cross at is the center 
 of the required circle. The radius is the distance from to any 
 of the three points. . 
 
 To find the Length of an Arc of a Circle, and measure it on a 
 Straight Line (Fig. 43). First method (when angle AOB is 
 less than 60 degrees): Given arc AB with center at 0. From 
 one end of the arc draw the tangent line AC. Draw line A B 
 and extend it to D, making AD equal to one half of line AB. 
 With D as a center, and radius DB, draw arc BC. Then AC 
 will be a straight line equal in length to the arc AB. Second 
 method: Draw tangent AC as before. Set the dividers at a 
 small distance. Start at point B, and space off the points 1, 2, 3, 
 etc., along the arc, until point 5 is reached. (Point 5 may come 
 at any place near the point A.) Do not remove the dividers from 
 the paper. Step back along the line the same number of spaces, 
 as shown. The line AC will then be very close to the length of
 
 CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 19 
 
 the arc AB. By taking small spaces, the chords may be assumed 
 equal to the arcs. 
 
 To draw a Tangent to a Circle at a Given Point on the Circle 
 (Fig. 44). Given point P. Place one triangle with its hypotenuse 
 passing through the given point, and the center of the circle as 
 indicated in first position. Using the other triangle as a base, 
 turn the first triangle over into the second position, and move it 
 until its hypotenuse passes through point P, when the tangent 
 
 AP may be drawn. The base triangle must be held firmly in 
 place in the one position. 
 
 To draw the Arc of a Circle of Given Radius, tangent to an Arc 
 and a Straight Line (Fig. 45). Given arc AB, line CD and radius 
 R. Draw line EF parallel to CD, and at a distance R from it. 
 With radius #2 = #1+ R and center 0' , draw an arc cutting 
 line EF at 0, the center of the required tangent arc. Note the 
 points of tangency, which are marked T. The point of tangency 
 of any two arcs is always on the line joining their centers. This 
 is further illustrated in Figs. 
 46 and 47, where the points 
 of tangency are marked T. 
 
 The Ellipse. An ellipse 
 (Fig. 48), is a curve formed 
 by a point moving so that 
 the sum of its distances from 
 two fixed points is a constant. 
 
 Fig. 48 
 
 Each of the two points \ and 
 Fz is called a focus. The 
 longest line, AB, drawn through the center is called the major 
 axis. The shortest line, CD, is called the minor axis. The con- 
 stant distance is equal to the major axis. A tangent to an 
 ellipse at any point may be constructed by drawing lines from
 
 20 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 the point to the foci. Extend the lines and bisect the angle 
 FiPE, or the angle F 2 PG. This bisecting line PH is the re- 
 quired tangent. A line through the point P and perpendicular 
 to the tangent is called a normal. The major and minor axes 
 
 of an ellipse being given, the 
 foci may be located by draw- 
 ing an arc with C or D as a 
 center, and a radius equal to 
 one half of the major axis. 
 B This arc will cut the major 
 axis at the foci. 
 
 To draw an Ellipse by the 
 Concentric Circle Method 
 (Fig. 49.) Given the major 
 and minor axes AB and CD. 
 With as a center, draw cir- 
 f/g. 49 c } eg Caving the major and 
 
 minor axes as diameters. Draw radial lines OeE, OfF, etc., divid- 
 ing the circles into a number of parts. Where the radial lines 
 cut the large circle, draw perpendicular lines. Where the radial 
 lines cut the small circle, draw horizontal lines. The intersection 
 of a vertical and horizontal line from the same radial line will 
 determine a point on the ellipse, as indicated at 1, 2, 3, and 4. 
 Determine as many points as necessary, and draw the curve 
 through them very lightly 
 free hand. It may then be 
 strengthened, using an ir- 
 regular curve. 
 
 To draw an Ellipse by 
 the Trammel Method (Fig. 
 50). Given the major and 
 minor axes AB and CD. 
 On a small strip of paper 
 mark off one half the minor 
 axis and one half the major axis, as shown in the figure. Place 
 the point 3 on the minor axis and the point 2 on the major 
 axis. Make a mark on the paper opposite the point 1. Move 
 the point 3 along the minor axis, keeping the point 2 on the 
 major axis and moving it as indicated by the arrows. The point 
 1 will then trace out the required ellipse. The usual method 
 
 . SO
 
 CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 21 
 
 is to place the trammel in a number of positions, and make 
 marks on the paper opposite the successive positions of point 1. 
 To draw a Curve having the Appearance of an Ellipse, by means 
 of Circular Arcs (Fig. 51). Given the major and minor axes AB 
 and CD. On the minor axis lay off 03 and 01, each equal to the 
 difference between the major and the minor axis. On the major 
 axis lay off 02 and 04, each equal to three fourths of 03. With 
 point 1 as a center, and a radius equal to 1C, draw the arc EGG. 
 
 With 3 as a center, and the same radius, draw the arc JDH. 
 With 2 and 4 as centers, and a radius equal to 2B, draw the arcs 
 GBH and EAJ. 
 
 The Involute. Tie a piece of string about a lead pencil point. 
 Place the triangular scale with its end resting upon a piece of 
 paper. Wind the string about the scale, keeping the pencil 
 point toward the paper. Hold the scale firmly with one hand. 
 Keeping the string tight, and the pencil point on the paper, un- 
 wind from the scale. The curve thus formed is the involute 
 of a triangle. The involute of any other figure may be obtained 
 by unwinding a string from the desired form. 
 
 To draw the Involute of a Triangle (Fig. 52). With A as a 
 center, and AC as a radius, draw an arc until it reaches the ex- 
 tension of side AB at point 1. With point B as a center, and 
 IB as a radius, draw an arc from 1 until it reaches the extension 
 of side CB at point 2. The curve may be continued by increasing 
 the radius each time that it passes the extension of one of the 
 sides. Compare this curve with the one drawn by means of the 
 triangular scale and string.
 
 22 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 To draw the Involute of a Circle (Fig. 53). Divide the arc of 
 a circle into a number of equal parts. Draw the radial lines OA, 
 OB, etc. At the end of each radial line draw a tangent. Starting 
 at point A, lay off the distance Al on the tangent equal to the 
 arc AG, using the second method of Fig. 43. Starting at B, lay 
 off the distance B2 on the tangent, equal to the arc BAG. Con- 
 tinuing, lay off on each tangent a distance from the point of 
 tangency equal in length to the arc of the circle, measured from 
 the point of tangency to the point G. 
 
 The Parabola. A parabola is a curve formed by a point mov- 
 ing so that its distance from a line called the directrix is always 
 equal to its distance from a point called the focus (Fig. 54). To 
 draw a parabola, having given the directrix CA D, and the focus F. 
 Draw a line parallel to the directrix, and at any distance from it. 
 Using this distance as a radius, and F as a center, draw an arc, 
 cutting the parallel line at point 1. Draw as many lines as may 
 be necessary, parallel to the directrix, and using their distances 
 from the directrix as radii, with F as a center, draw arcs cutting 
 them, thus locating points on the required parabola. 
 
 To draw an Equilateral Hyperbola (Fig. 55). Given the point 
 P and the axes G and H. Draw horizontal and vertical lines 
 through point P. On each side of point P step off equal distances 
 PF, PA, AB, etc. Draw lines from to each of the points 
 thus determined. Where line OA crosses the vertical line at 
 point a, draw a horizontal line. Through point A draw a vertical 
 line intersecting the horizontal line just drawn at point 1, a point 
 on the required curve. Horizontal and vertical lines drawn 
 from the diagonals will locate other points on the curve, as shown 
 at 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 PROJECTIONS 
 
 Purpose of Drawings. The representation of objects and 
 constructions having three dimensions upon a surface having 
 two dimensions has been accomplished in many ways, some of 
 which are illustrated in Fig. 56. 
 
 Drawings have two principal uses which are: 
 
 I. To tell the shape, 
 II. To tell the size. 
 
 A drawing tells the shape by the position of the various lines, 
 
 Orthographic 
 
 Fig. 
 
 These numbers are called 
 
 while numbers are used to tell the size, 
 dimensions. 
 
 Orthographic Projection. Most engineering drawings are 
 made in "orthographic projection." By this -means the shape 
 and proportions of a construction may be 
 accurately defined. The number of views 
 depends upon the object or construction to 
 be described. This can be understood by 
 reference to Fig. 57, which shows two views 
 of a cylinder. The upper view shows the 
 circular form and the lower view shows 
 the height of the cylinder. Notice that the 
 diameter of the upper view is the width 
 of the lower view, and that the two views 
 are included between parallel vertical lines, 
 three views is shown on Fig. 58. 
 
 23 
 
 Height- 
 
 An object requiring 
 Note the arrangement of the
 
 24 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 views. The top and front views are included between parallel 
 
 vertical lines, and the front and side views are included between 
 
 parallel horizontal lines. 
 The Planes of Projection. The method of obtaining the 
 
 views and getting them hi the correct relative positions will be 
 
 explained in con- 
 nection with Figs. 
 59 and 60. Con- 
 sider two glass 
 planes, one hori- 
 zontal and one 
 vertical (Fig. 59), 
 with an object 
 placed in the angle 
 thus formed. By 
 
 S/cfe 
 
 F/g. 
 
 looking through the vertical plane the front of the object may be 
 seen, and if this view is marked out on the glass, it is called the 
 front view, elevation, or vertical projection. If, instead of look- 
 
 Line 
 
 F/g. 59 
 
 ing through the glass, we consider that lines have been drawn 
 from every point in the object perpendicular to the vertical 
 plane, the object is said to be projected out to the vertical 
 plane. The lines are called projection lines. By joining the
 
 PROJECTIONS 
 
 25 
 
 points in which the projection lines touch the vertical plane the 
 front view will be obtained. In the same manner the top view, 
 plan, or horizontal projection may be found by projecting up 
 
 \ 
 
 Fig. 6O 
 
 to the horizontal plane. If the joint between the two planes is 
 now taken as an axis, the horizontal plane may be revolved up 
 about the axis until it is in the same plane with the vertical 
 plane. This brings the top view directly above the front view. 
 
 By placing a 
 third glass plane 
 at one side of the P 
 
 object, and per- 
 pendicular to the 
 other two planes, 
 as shown in Fig. 
 60, a side view a 
 
 
 r 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 L - 
 
 t 
 
 - 
 
 
 T 
 1 
 
 Right Side 
 
 may be obtained. 
 The plane con- 
 taining this side 
 view can be re- 
 volved about the 
 axis shown until 
 it is in the same plane with the vertical plane. This brings the 
 side view on the same line with the front view, as shown in Fig. 
 61, where the three views are in their correct positions. 
 
 Some Rules. The following points should be thoroughly 
 understood, as projection is the basis for all shop drawings.
 
 26 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Note the three views of the point P in Figs. 59, 60, and 61. 
 Locate other points in the same manner until all points on the 
 object are accounted for in each of the three views. 
 
 Horizontal distances (as L) show the same in the top and 
 front views. 
 
 Vertical distances (as H) show the same in the front and side 
 views. 
 
 a 
 
 fnV fnl fPi 
 
 (^J Lr^J ^ 
 
 r^-, 
 ITTI || 
 
 Lj I 1 { 1 
 
 Fig. 62 
 
 Vertical distances (as W ) in top view are horizontal distances 
 (W) in the side view. 
 
 The top view is the same length as the front view. 
 
 The top view is the same width as the side view. 
 
 The front view is the same height as the side view. 
 
 The front of the side view is toward the front view. 
 
 The front of the top view is toward the front view. 
 
 The arrows (Fig. 61 ) indicate the relation of the front view to 
 the other views. 
 
 Note the difference between the left side view and the right 
 side view. 
 
 Lines which represent visible surfaces are full lines. 
 
 Lines which represent invisible surfaces are dotted lines. (See 
 left side view, where it is necessary to look through the object 
 in order to locate the horizontal dotted line.) 
 
 The top and front views of any point are always in the same 
 perpendicular line. 
 
 The front and side views of any point are always in the same 
 horizontal line. 
 
 Dotted Lines. The question of dotted lines is illustrated in 
 Fig. 62, where two views of several objects are shown. A is a 
 square prism with a square hole all the way through; B is a 
 cylinder with a circular hole all the way through; C is a square 
 prism with a square hole extending from the top down to the 
 depth shown in the front view (note that the top views of A 
 and C are the same, and that the front views show the extent
 
 PROJECTIONS 
 
 27 
 
 of the holes); D is a cylinder with a hole extending up part 
 way from the bottom, as shown in the front view, therefore the 
 hole shows dotted in the top view; E is a square prism with a 
 cylindrical boss on top; F is a cylinder with a smaller cylinder 
 extending downward from the under side, thus the small cylinder 
 is dotted in the top view; compare F and D, which show 
 that it is necessary to read both views to determine the object. 
 A large number of all sorts of projection problems should be 
 solved to obtain a thorough understanding of orthographic pro- 
 jection. 
 
 Axis or Center i/'ne 
 
 rig. 63 
 
 Auxiliary Views. The three planes just described are per- 
 pendicular to each other, like the boards coming together at the 
 corner of a box. The faces of an object which are parallel to the 
 three planes are projected to these planes in their true size 
 and shape. It is often desirable to show the true shape of a face 
 which is not parallel to any of the three regular planes. In such 
 cases, Fig. 63, an extra plane called an auxiliary plane may be 
 used. This extra plane is placed so as to be parallel to the in- 
 clined face. The inclined face is then projected to the auxiliary 
 plane by perpendicular projecting lines, as shown in Fig. 63. 
 
 The distances W and S then show in their true length and the 
 hole shows the true shape in which it cuts the inclined face. Com- 
 pare the auxiliary plane with the side plane. Notice that the 
 distance W shows in its true length in the side plane, but that the 
 vertical dimension is H, which is shorter than S. The auxiliary
 
 28 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 plane and the side plane may be revolved about the center line 
 or axis until they are parallel to the plane of the paper. This 
 has been done in Fig. 64, where the object is shown by its projec- 
 tions. Note the location of the points 1, 2, 3, and 4. The center 
 
 line of the auxiliary view 
 is parallel to the inclined 
 face. The width W is the 
 same in the auxiliary view 
 and in the side view. The 
 points 1, 2, 3, and 4 are 
 
 Tr -?r ^ 7* -s p ! 2TT located in the auxiliary 
 \^~ ^^\ ^^ ^' ~(^\ view by projecting lines 
 
 perpendicular to the in- 
 clined face which cross the 
 center line at right angles. 
 The distances on either 
 side of the center line are then obtained from the side view 
 and measured on the corresponding projection lines of the auxiliary 
 view, as illustrated for point 4. 
 Compare Figs. 63 and 64 carefully. 
 
 Required Views. A bracket is shown in pictorial form in 
 Fig. 65, together with its three views in orthographic projection. 
 Note the relation of the views. A picture of an object is shown 
 
 Pig. 64- 
 
 fig. 65 r/g. 66 
 
 in Fig. 66. Since most of its detail is inclined, a side view and 
 auxiliary view are used. In this way true shapes are shown. 
 Other views are not needed. They would be somewhat difficult 
 to_ draw and would not add anything to what is already shown. 
 Very good practice is to be had by deciding the number of views
 
 PROJECTIONS 
 
 29 
 
 and proper treatment for such machine parts and constructions 
 as one encounters. 
 
 The Imaginary Cutting Plane. It is not always possible to 
 indicate easily and clearly the interior construction of a machine 
 
 Fig. 71 
 
 69 
 
 or part by means of dotted lines. In such cases resort is had to 
 imaginary cutting planes which reveal the hidden parts. 
 
 Such an imaginary cutting plane passing through the object 
 of Fig. 67 is shown in Fig. 68. The part in front of the cutting 
 plane is removed in Fig. 69, leaving the object as shown in Fig. 
 70, where the surfaces cut by the plane are indicated by parallel 
 inclined lines. Such a surface is said to be cross-hatched or 
 section-lined. The view is called a section, or sectional elevation. 
 In orthographic projection the two views are drawn as hi Fig. 71, 
 where the section occupies the same position relative to the top 
 view as the front view which it replaces. Note that the top 
 view is shown complete. The top edge of the cutting plane is 
 shown as a center line in the top view. The rules of projection 
 apply to sectional views. The object is imagined to be cut by a 
 plane and the part in front of the plane removed in order to show 
 the cut surfaces and the details beyond the cutting plane. 
 
 Representation of Cut Surfaces. The surfaces which lie in 
 the imaginary plane are indicated by a series of parallel lines. 
 Different pieces are shown by changing the direction of the lines. 
 The width of spacing for section lines is determined by the area 
 to be sectioned. Different materials are sometimes indicated by
 
 30 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 different forms of section lining. Fig. 72 gives the forms sug- 
 gested by a committee of the American Society of Mechanical 
 
 Orig/na/ ftf/ing 
 Earfh ' 
 
 Of her Moter/o/s 
 
 Fig. 72 
 
 Engineers. The character of sectioning should not be depended 
 upon to tell the material. It should always be given in a note 
 if it is not perfectly evident.
 
 CHAPTER V 
 MATERIALS AND STRESSES 
 
 Materials. Engineering constructions must carry loads and 
 transmit motions. For such purposes various materials are made 
 use of according to their adaptability. The most used material 
 is iron in its different forms cast iron; wrought iron; steel; 
 and the steel alloys. In addition to iron there are the yellow 
 metals, or brass and bronze compositions, white metals or babbitt, 
 tin, lead, etc., and the various timbers. 
 
 It is important for the draftsman to know something of the 
 properties of these materials, the methods of forming into ma- 
 chine parts, and the relative expense, so that a proper selection 
 of material may be made for the particular case in hand. 
 
 Cast Iron. Cast iron is a hard, brittle, granular substance 
 obtained by burning the impurities from various ores, the most 
 common being 
 
 Magnetic Oxide, or Magnetite 
 Ferric Oxide, or Red Hematite 
 Brown Hematite 
 Spathic Ore 
 
 Cast iron contains carbon and various impurities, such as 
 silicon, manganese, phosphorus, sulphur, etc. 
 
 White Iron. There are two principal kinds of cast iron : 
 white cast iron, in which the carbon is chemically combined, and 
 gray cast iron, in which the carbon is free or mixed in the form 
 of graphite. White cast iron contains a small amount of carbon, 
 and is very hard and brittle. It is used in the manufacture of 
 wrought iron and steel. White cast iron is very difficult to 
 machine. 
 
 Gray Iron. Gray cast iron contains some carbon in chemical 
 combination and a considerable amount in the form of graphite, 
 which is mixed with the iron. Gray iron is softer than white 
 iron and is easily machined. It contains from 0.5 per cent to 
 1 per cent of combined carbon up to 2 per cent. 
 
 31
 
 32 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Properties of Cast Iron. Cast iron is the most useful of 
 metals, as it can be readily melted and cast into any desired form 
 by first making a mold. For this reason it is adapted for making 
 complicated shapes. Its cheapness renders it available where 
 
 Fig. 73 
 
 Fig. 74 
 
 rigidity and weight are required. Cast iron cannot be welded 
 and has very little elasticity, so that it is not adapted for use 
 where shocks and sudden loads are to be cared for. 
 
 Cast iron has a crystalline structure, and when cooling the 
 crystals form at right angles to the surface. Where square 
 corners are encountered the arrangement is as indicated in Fig. 
 
 Fig. 75 
 
 73, in which fracture is likely to occur along a&, called the plane of 
 fracture. This may be prevented by rounding, as in Fig. 74. 
 Cast iron expands at the moment of solidifying, but shrinks upon 
 cooling. This action sets up cooling strains in the casting, espe- 
 cially if there exists a considerable variation in the thickness of 
 the section in the different parts of the piece. For this reason 
 a uniform cooling arrangement is always desirable, and sudden 
 changes in section should be avoided.
 
 MATERIALS AND STRESSES 
 
 33 
 
 Cast iron is about four times as strong in compression as it is in 
 tension. 
 
 Wrought Iron. Wrought iron is almost pure iron, obtained 
 by melting pig iron and squeezing out the impurities while it is 
 in a plastic state. For such purposes a puddling furnace (Fig. 
 75) is used. Iron is put into the furnace and melted. When in a 
 plastic state it is taken in the form of a ball on the end of a puddle 
 bar and squeezed or pounded and heated again. This process is 
 
 UMDER PKE.SSUKE. 
 
 Fig. 76 
 
 continued until most of the impurities are burned or squeezed 
 out. It is then rolled into bars or billets. These billets are 
 further rolled into rods of various shapes and sizes called merchant 
 bars. This rolling process gives the iron a fibrous structure due 
 to a certain amount of impurities which remain after the puddling. 
 Wrought iron contains a very small amount of carbon. 
 
 Properties of Wrought Iron. Wrought iron is malleable and 
 is the best material to withstand shocks. It stretches and so 
 gives warning before breaking. It cannot be cast, but must be 
 rolled or forged into the forms required. For this reason it is 
 not adapted for complicated shapes. It can be welded, punched, 
 bent, etc. Owing to its method of manufacture, it is expensive
 
 34 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 and is supplanted to a considerable extent by mild steel, which 
 has a similar composition. Wrought iron is almost equally strong 
 in tension and compression. It is stronger in the direction of the 
 fibers than across them. 
 
 Steel. Steel is made by burning carbon and impurities out 
 of pig iron and then adding the desired amount of carbon. An- 
 other method is to add carbon to wrought iron. There are two 
 processes of making steel from pig iron: the Bessemer process 
 and the open-hearth process. 
 
 Bessemer Process. In the Bessemer process from five to 
 twenty tons of melted pig iron is put into a converter (Fig. 76). 
 Air under a pressure of about twenty pounds per square inch is 
 caused to pass in streams up through the metal, and the carbon 
 and impurities are burned out. This requires about ten minutes, 
 and leaves practically pure iron, to which the proper carbon 
 content is added by putting in liquid spiegeleisen (white iron) or 
 ferromanganese. This makes it into steel, which is poured into 
 ingots. These ingots are rolled into blooms and other desired 
 
 Open-hearth Process. By this process large amounts of 
 steel are made at one time, generally about fifty tons. Steel, 
 scrap, and pig iron are melted on the hearth of a Siemens regen- 
 erative furnace. The metal is kept in agitation by chemical reac- 
 tions, caused by adding iron scale or scrap iron which furnish the 
 necessary carbon. 
 
 Properties of Steel. Steel is composed of iron and carbon in 
 chemical combination. It has a uniform granular structure and 
 may be formed to shape by forging, rolling, or casting. Steel 
 varies greatly in its qualities, depending upon the carbon content. 
 It is sometimes designated as 
 
 Soft Steel about 0.19 % carbon 
 
 Medium Steel " 0.30% 
 
 Hard Steel " 0.75 % up to 1.8 % carbon 
 
 Steel having less than 0.25% is frequently called mild steel. 
 
 Malleable Iron. Small parts of cast iron can be made less 
 brittle by being surrounded by iron scale or some form of an 
 oxide of iron and kept at a bright red heat for over sixty hours. 
 In this way some of the carbon is removed and the material is 
 made to resemble wrought iron. It is used for small pieces which
 
 MATERIALS AND STRESSES 35 
 
 cannot be easily forged. Hardware castings, pipe fittings, etc., 
 are often made of malleable iron. 
 
 Suggestions for Selection of Material. The best method of 
 learning the proper materials to be used is by observation. The 
 material best adapted cannot always be used, because of cost, 
 method of shaping, etc. Ask why, when a special material is 
 used. The "factor of cost" is always present the "factor 
 of safety" should always be considered first. Observe broken 
 parts of machines as a valuable means of obtaining sound in- 
 formation. The use of special metals is often one of trial and 
 observation. Some things which influence the selection of ma- 
 terial are given below : 
 
 Method of Shaping 
 
 Casting Cost of Pattern 
 
 Forging Drop Forging Die 
 
 Pressing Stamping 
 
 Extrusion Drawing 
 
 Rolling 
 
 Number Required 
 Method of Finishing 
 Strength Required 
 Kind of Loads 
 Moving or Stationary Parts 
 Lightness or Weight 
 Wear 
 Where liquids or gases are used the chemical action must be 
 
 considered. 
 
 Loads and Stresses. The materials used in machines are 
 subject to various loadings which must be resisted by these ma- 
 terials. The internal resistance must be equal to the external 
 or applied load, or the part will fail. There are many ways of 
 applying the load, each bringing into play a different form of 
 resistance by the material. This resistance is called stress. 
 Stress is a measure of the strength of the material to resist an 
 external load. There are three kinds of simple stresses: tension, 
 compression, and shear. 
 
 Axial Stresses. A bar is a portion of material having a 
 uniform section, such as a cylinder or prism. When a load is 
 applied to a bar so as to be uniformly distributed it is called an
 
 36 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 axial load. Such a load produces a direct stress in the bar. The 
 section made by passing a plane at right angles to the axis of the 
 bar is called a cross section. The area of this section is the cross- 
 sectional area and is usually spoken of as the area. It is generally 
 measured hi square inches. 
 
 When a load is applied to a bar so that it tends to lengthen 
 the bar it produces a tensile stress (Fig. 77). When the applied 
 load tends to shorten or compress the bar it produces a com- 
 
 A7\ 
 
 Fig. 7B 
 
 Fig. 79 
 
 pressive stress (Fig. 78). When the applied load acts at right 
 angles to the bar and tends to push one cross-sectional plane by 
 another it produces a shearing stress (Fig. 79). 
 
 Unit Stresses. In order that the strength of various materials 
 may be compared, the strength of a bar one inch square is used 
 as a unit. The strength of such a bar is called the unit stress, 
 or stress per square inch of cross-sectional area. The stress is 
 usually given in pounds per square inch. To find the unit stress, 
 divide the applied load by the cross sectional area, or: 
 
 Let A = area of cross section in square inches. 
 P = total load in pounds. 
 / = stress in pounds per square inch. 
 
 Then the unit stress is 
 
 = P (load) 
 A (area)
 
 MATERIALS AND STRESSES 37 
 
 Thus, if a rod has an area of 3 J /2 square inches and is subject to a 
 load of 35,000 pounds, it has a unit stress of 
 
 / = - = 3 -^? = 10,000 Ib. per square inch. 
 A 3.5 
 
 Elastic Limit. From the formula given above it follows that 
 if the load is doubled, the unit stress will also be doubled. This 
 means that the unit stress is proportional to the load. By ex- 
 periment it has been found that this law does not hold for all 
 loads, but only up to a certain load (depending upon the material). 
 This load or limit is called the elastic limit and is expressed in 
 pounds per square inch. For stresses less than the elastic limit 
 the increase or decrease in length of the bar is directly propor- 
 tional to the stress. The increase or decrease in length is called 
 the strain, and the total strain divided by the length is called 
 the unit strain. 
 
 Let I = length in inches 
 
 e = change in length in inches 
 
 s = unit strain 
 Then 
 
 e 
 
 Modulus of Elasticity. Below the elastic limit both the 
 unit stress and the unit strain are proportional to the load, so 
 that they bear a constant relation to each other. This relation 
 is expressed as the quotient obtained by dividing the unit stress 
 by the unit strain, which will give a constant called the modulus 
 of elasticity and represented by E. 
 
 Then Stress" / 
 
 Ei = = 
 
 Strain s 
 
 p 
 
 Ultimate Strength. Ihe formula /= gives the unit stress 
 
 A 
 
 of a material for a given load. If the load is sufficiently large 
 the piece will break or rupture. The value of / when rupture 
 takes place is called the ultimate strength of the material. 
 
 Factor of Safety. The ultimate strengths of materials as 
 well as the elastic limits are not constants, although most of them 
 are pretty well known from large numbers of tests. However,
 
 38 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 it is not desirable to stress a material too near its elastic limit, 
 as there may be imperfections or lack of uniformity. The manner 
 in which the load is applied also affects the stress which it is safe 
 to impose upon a given material. For this reason various "factors 
 of safety" are used. A factor of safety is a number obtained by 
 dividing the ultimate strength of a material by the unit stress 
 actually imposed upon it. The actual stress is referred to as 
 the safe working stress. Often the safe working stress is ob- 
 tained by dividing the ultimate strength by a suitable factor of 
 safety, depending upon the nature of the loading. 
 
 Average Values. The values given in the following tables 
 are averages and will serve for purposes of computation in the 
 absence of more definite figures. 
 
 ELASTIC LIMITS 
 
 
 Pounds per 
 
 Square Inch 
 
 
 Tension 
 
 Compression 
 
 Cast Iron 
 
 6000 
 
 20000 
 
 Wrought Iron 
 Steel 
 
 25,000 
 35,000 
 
 25,000 
 35,000 
 
 
 
 
 MODULI OF ELASTICITY 
 
 Pounds per Square Inch 
 
 Cast Iron 
 
 15000000 
 
 Wrought Iron 
 
 27000000 
 
 Steel 
 
 30000000 
 
 
 
 ULTIMATE STRENGTHS 
 
 Pounds per Square Inch 
 
 
 Tension 
 
 Compression 
 
 Shear 
 
 Cast Iron 
 Wrought Iron 
 Steel 
 
 20,000 
 
 50,000 
 60,000 to 100,000 
 
 90,000 
 50,000 
 60,000 to 150,000 
 
 18,000 
 40,000 
 50,000 to 80,000
 
 MATERIALS AND STRESSES 
 
 39 
 
 FACTORS OF SAFETY 
 
 
 
 
 Live Load 
 
 
 Material 
 
 Dead Load 
 
 One Kind of 
 
 Stress 
 
 Alternate 
 Tension and 
 Compression 
 
 Varying 
 Loads. 
 Shocks 
 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 Wrought Iron 
 
 
 
 
 
 and Steel. . . 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 12
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 SCREW THREADS 
 
 Uses of Screw Threads. A screw is a cylindrical bar having 
 a helical projection. The form of this helical projection varies, 
 according to the uses to which the screw is put. Screws are 
 used for the following purposes: To fasten parts of machines 
 together; to transmit motion; to convert rotation into transla- 
 tion, or vice versa; for the adjustment of parts in their relation 
 to one another. 
 
 The Helix. A helix is a curve generated by a point moving 
 equal distances lengthwise of a cylinder while it is moving equal 
 
 5 6 7 8 9 IO II 13 I 
 
 frg. 60 
 
 distances around the cylinder. If a right triangle is wound 
 around a cylinder the hypotenuse will form a helix. The points 
 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., of Fig. 80 will come at the same numbers on the 
 curve when the triangle is wound around the cylinder. The 
 pitch of a helix is the distance which the point moves parallel to 
 the axis while it goes once around the cylinder. 
 
 To draw the Projections of a Helix. In Fig. 80 let D be the 
 diameter and let the pitch be the distance indicated. Divide 
 the circle shown in the top view into any convenient number of 
 equal parts, and draw vertical lines through each point. Divide 
 the pitch into the same number of equal parts and draw horizontal 
 
 40
 
 SCREW THREADS 
 
 41 
 
 lines. For each space around the cylinder the point will move 
 
 one of the spaces along the pitch, thus locating the curve as shown. 
 
 Parts of a Screw. A screw is known by its outside diameter, 
 
 Fig. 81 
 
 indicated in Fig. 81 by d. The diameter d\ is called the root 
 diameter. Point 6 is the top of the thread and point a the bot- 
 tom, or root. The area corresponding to di is called the root 
 area. One half the difference between the outside diameter and 
 the root diameter is called the depth of the thread. 
 
 Right- and Left-hand Screws. Screws may be either right - 
 or left-hand. A right-hand screw thread (Fig. 93) requires the 
 
 r 
 
 tera 
 
 h H H 
 /v^. 82 
 
 screw to be turned in a clockwise direction to enter the nut. 
 A left-hand screw thread (Fig. 99) must be turned counter-clock- 
 wise when entering. The pitch of a screw thread is the distance 
 which the screw will advance for one complete turn for a single 
 threaded screw. 
 
 Forms of Screw Threads. The forms of screw threads are 
 shown in the accompanying figures. Fig. 82 shows the Sellers, 
 Franklin Institute, or U. S. Standard thread, as used quite gen- 
 erally in the United States. The proportions are indicated on 
 the figures. The tops and bottoms of the V's are flattened so 
 that the depth of the thread is decreased 0.25 the depth of the
 
 42 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 V. The flats make the thread less liable to injury on the sharp 
 V's and less liable to weakening at the bottom of the grooves 
 than the sharper V thread shown in Fig. 83. This form of thread 
 
 f/g.86 
 
 Hg. 89 
 
 is also in quite general use. It is conveniently formed on a lathe, 
 and does not require a special tool, or regrinding of the tool, as 
 is the case for the U. S. Standard. The angle for both the above 
 forms is 60 degrees. 
 
 The Whitworth thread, or standard of Great Britain, is illus- 
 trated in Fig. 84. In this form the angle is 55 degrees. The threads 
 are rounded off at the top and bottom, making a strong shape. 
 
 Fig. 91 
 
 The forms described above are the ones most commonly used 
 for fastening parts together. 
 
 Fig. 86 shows the square thread, a form well adapted for use 
 in transmitting motion. 
 
 The Acme thread, a modification of the square thread, is shown 
 in Fig. 87. The angle may be either 29 or 30 degrees. This 
 form is used for transmitting motion. The relieving of the 
 thread allows the use of a split nut. A common example is the
 
 SCREW THREADS 
 
 43 
 
 lead screw of a lathe. Fig. 88 shows the buttress or breechlock 
 thread so called from its use in guns to take the recoil. It is 
 designed to take pressure in one direction only. This form has 
 the strength in shear of the V form, but avoids the tendency to 
 
 Fig. 
 
 split the nut. Fig. 85 shows the knuckle or rounded screw 
 thread. This form can be cast in a mold. It is used only for 
 rough work. Fig. 89 shows the common wood screw. An 
 attempt is made to consider the differences in strength of the 
 
 Fig. 95 
 
 Fig. 96 
 
 wood and steel. For adjustment, Figs. 82, 83, 84, 86, and 87 
 are used. Thrust screws for pillow blocks, crossheads, etc., are 
 familiar examples of adjusting screws. 
 
 Multiple Threads. Screws may have either single, double, 
 or other multiple threads. A single-threaded screw consists of 
 a single helical projection (Fig. 90). The pitch is the distance 
 from one thread point to the next thread point. The lead is the
 
 44 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 distance which the screw will advance for one turn. When a 
 large pitch is required on a small diameter, the arrangement of 
 Fig. 91 would weaken the screw by reducing the root diameter 
 (Fig. 91) at point A. To avoid this, two parallel helical projec- 
 tions may be used, as shown at B (Fig. 91). This is called a double 
 
 f= 
 
 fig. 9 7 
 
 . 96 
 
 fig. -99 
 
 f/g. 100 
 
 thread. Similarly, a triple or quadruple thread may be formed. 
 In this manner a large lead may be obtained without lessening 
 the strength of the screw. 
 
 Split Nut and Square Thread. A portion of a square threaded 
 screw, and a section of a nut for^use with it are shown in Fig. 92. 
 
 Fig. 101 
 
 Fig. 102 
 
 F/g. 103 
 
 The method of drawing the helix has already been explained. 
 Note the dotted line a-b, which indicates the undercutting of 
 surface abc, and shows why a split nut cannot be removed from 
 a square threaded screw. The sloping side of the Acme thread 
 does away with this undercutting and allows the removal of a 
 split nut. 
 
 Conventional Representation of Screw Threads. It is not 
 often necessary to draw the helix in representing threads, as 
 there are a number of conventional representations in use. Figs. 
 93 to 100 are common methods. Figs. 93 to 98 are for right- 
 hand threads, Figs. 99 and 100 are for left-hand threads, and 
 Figs. 96 to 98 are for either right- or left-hand threads. It is not
 
 SCREW THREADS 
 
 45 
 
 generally necessary to draw the pitch to scale. The distance 
 between lines may be estimated by eye and arranged to avoid 
 crowding of the lines. The number of threads per inch of other 
 than U. S. Standard should be given by note, as "12 threads per 
 
 Fig. 104 
 
 inch, right hand." This may be abbreviated to "12 Thds. R. H." 
 or " 12 Thds. L. H." Sometimes the number is given for U. S. 
 Standard as indicated in Fig. 96, or the Roman numeral may be 
 used, as in Fig. 95. 
 Three representations for square threads are shown in Figs. 101, 
 
 
 
 n / 
 
 J 
 
 S 
 
 ~-JJ 
 
 
 
 i[ 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 Fig. IO5 
 
 Pig. 106 
 
 102, and 103. The square threads are generally drawn to scale, 
 and if of large diameter the helix may be drawn in, as in Fig. 92. 
 
 Threaded Holes. Representations for threaded holes are 
 shown in plan, elevation, and section, in Fig. 104. It will be 
 observed that the lines representing the threads slope in the
 
 46 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 opposite direction when the hole is shown in section. The reason 
 for this is that the far side of the thread is seen. As shown, 
 either single or double circles may be used in the plan view. 
 When the last two forms are used they should always be marked 
 
 "Tap" as indicated. 
 For small diameters, 
 the V's may be put 
 in free hand. The 
 lines representing the 
 
 F/g. 107 f/g. lOa r/g. 109 
 
 roots of the threads 
 
 when visible are sometimes made heavier, but when dotted all 
 lines should be of uniform thickness. 
 
 Strength of Screw Threads. There are three methods of 
 failure, shearing of threads, tension at the root of threads, and 
 bursting of the nut. 
 
 Let f s = unit shearing stress in pounds per square inch. 
 ft = unit tensile stress in pounds per square inch. 
 p = pitch in inches 
 I = length in inches 
 
 The shearing strength of the V thread (Fig. 105) will be 
 P s = TT d, If. 
 
 and for square threads (Fig. 106) having the same outside diameter 
 
 and pitch , , , , 
 
 P 8 = ird 2 l /z f, 
 
 which shows that the square thread is much weaker in shear 
 than the V thread. 
 
 The tensile strength of the V thread (Fig. 105) will be 
 
 P t -V4irdi/ 
 
 and for the square thread, Fig. 106, having the same outside 
 diameter and pitch p _ i / j 2 / 
 
 * == /4 TT C*2 jt 
 
 The V thread will have a considerable tendency to burst the 
 nut, as shown in Fig. 107. As the angle between the threads 
 decreases, this bursting tendency decreases until the square form 
 is reached, when it becomes zero (Fig. 109). 
 
 The following tables give some desirable data concerning screw 
 threads. Further information may be found in the handbooks 
 published by Machinery and American Machinist.
 
 SCREW THREADS 
 
 47 
 
 DIMENSIONS OF U. S. STANDARD THREADS 
 
 Diameter 
 
 Threads 
 per Inch 
 
 Diameter 
 of Tap Drill 
 
 Root 
 Diameter 
 
 Root 
 Area 
 
 V4 
 
 20 
 
 Vl6 
 
 .185 
 
 .026 
 
 Vl6 
 
 18 
 
 V4 
 
 .241 
 
 .045 
 
 3 /8 
 
 16 
 
 Vl6 
 
 .294 
 
 .068 
 
 Vl6 
 
 14 
 
 23 /64 
 
 .345 
 
 .093 
 
 Vi 
 
 13 
 
 13 /32 
 
 .400 
 
 .126 
 
 Vli 
 
 12 
 
 15 /32 
 
 .454 
 
 .162 
 
 ' V8 
 
 11 
 
 17 /32 
 
 .507 
 
 .202 
 
 3 /4 
 
 10 
 
 6 /8 
 
 .620 
 
 .302 
 
 '/ 
 
 9 
 
 3 /4 
 
 .731 
 
 .420 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 27 /32 
 
 .838 
 
 .551 
 
 Wi 
 
 7 
 
 31 /32 
 
 .940 
 
 .693 
 
 IV 4 
 
 7 
 
 W32 
 
 1.065 
 
 .889 
 
 ! 3 /3 
 
 6 
 
 IV 16 
 
 1.159 
 
 1.054 
 
 1V 
 
 6 
 
 !'/ 
 
 1.284 
 
 1.293 
 
 IV.' 
 
 5V. 
 
 ! 13 /32 
 
 1.389 
 
 1.515 
 
 W 4 
 
 5 
 
 iVi 
 
 1.491 
 
 1.744 
 
 ! 7 /8 
 
 5 
 
 ! 5 /8 
 
 1.616 
 
 2.049 
 
 2 
 
 4 1 / 2 
 
 1V4 
 
 1.711 
 
 2.300 
 
 TENSILE STRENGTH OF U. S. STANDARD SCREW THREADS 
 
 Diameter 
 
 Threads 
 per Inch 
 
 Total Strength of One Bolt for Unit Stresses of 
 
 4000 
 
 5000 
 
 6000 
 
 l /4 
 
 20 
 
 105 
 
 135 
 
 160 
 
 3 /8 
 
 16 
 
 270 
 
 340 
 
 405 
 
 Vi 
 
 13 
 
 500 
 
 625 
 
 750 
 
 5 /8 
 
 11 
 
 805 
 
 1010 
 
 1210 
 
 3 /4 
 
 10 
 
 1200 
 
 1500 
 
 1800 
 
 7 /8 
 
 9 
 
 1680 
 
 2100 
 
 2520 
 
 1V 8 
 
 8 
 
 2200 
 
 2750 
 
 3300 
 
 iVt 
 
 7 
 
 2770 
 
 3460 
 
 4160 
 
 Wi 
 
 7 
 
 3120 
 
 3900 
 
 4680 
 
 ! 3 /8 
 
 6 
 
 4240 
 
 5300 
 
 6360 
 
 iVi 
 
 6 
 
 5120 
 
 6400 
 
 7680 
 
 ! 5 /8 
 
 5 1 / 2 
 
 6120 
 
 7650 
 
 9180 
 
 IV 4 
 
 5 
 
 7040 
 
 8800 
 
 10560 
 
 r/8 
 
 5 
 
 8120 
 
 10150 
 
 12180 
 
 2 
 
 4 1 / 2 
 
 9200 
 
 11500 
 
 13800
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 BOLTS AND SCREWS 
 
 THE most common fastening for holding parts of machines 
 together is some form of bolt or screw. There is a great variety 
 of forms, many of which are shown in this chapter. 
 
 U. S. Standard Bolts. Figs. 110 and 111 show the pro- 
 portions of the U. S. Standard hexagonal bolt head and nut. 
 As indicated, there are two general forms, chamf erred (Fig. 110) 
 and rounded (Fig. 111). The same proportions hold for both 
 types. The rounded type is used when the parts to be bolted 
 together are nicely finished. The distance across flats W is 
 made equal to one and one half times the diameter, plus one 
 eighth inch, or 
 
 w iy. ***/" 
 
 The thickness of the bolt head is made equal to one half the 
 distance across flats, or 
 
 T = 3 /4d+Vi6" 
 
 The thickness of the nut is made equal to the diameter in all 
 cases. These same formulae hold good for both the hexagonal 
 and square forms. Fig. 112 shows the square form. 
 
 The radii for the various arcs are shown on the figures, and 
 when not given in terms of the diameter are obtained from the 
 construction, as indicated. The distance across corners is gen- 
 erally found by construction, as indicated in Fig. 110, by drawing 
 a line xy at 30 degrees with the base of the head. 
 
 x-z = one hah" distance across flats 
 x-y '= one half distance across corners 
 
 It should be noted that the radii R and Ri of Fig. Ill, are both 
 drawn from the same center. The length of the radius Ri is 
 found by construction when drawing the bolt head or nut. When 
 
 48
 
 BOLTS AND SCREWS 
 
 49 
 
 ^r 
 
 fcsr^r 
 
 fiii 
 
 Fig. /IS 
 
 heads or nuts are finished or machined, the distance across flats 
 is often made Vie inch smaller than standard, in which case 
 
 W -I'd+
 
 50 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 The proportions of bolt heads and nuts are collected in the 
 following list, which also gives some approximate values to be 
 used when drawing to small scale, or where exact size is not 
 important. 
 
 
 
 Exact 
 
 Approximate 
 
 Diameter of bolt 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 Distance across flats 
 
 W 
 
 3 /2<2 + 1 /&" 
 
 ! 3 / 4 d 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 Thickness of bolt head 
 
 T 
 
 
 7 /s d 
 
 
 
 
 ft /i6 - 2 
 
 
 
 (Hex.) distance across corners. . 
 
 (7 H 
 
 1.155TF 
 
 P/4 d + 1 /8 
 
 2d 
 
 Thickness of nut 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 (Square) distance across corners 
 
 C s 
 
 1.414TF 
 
 2.3d 
 
 
 Bolts. A through bolt is one which extends through two 
 pieces, and carries a nut, as shown in Fig. 113. Care must be 
 taken to allow sufficient thread to insure the two pieces being held 
 firmly together. For this reason, the distance from the end of 
 
 fig. //-? 
 
 Fig. 114 
 
 r/g.H5 
 
 the thread at A to the under side of the head B must be less 
 than the thickness of the two flanges. Since the bolt head and 
 nut are standard only three dimensions are necessary when 
 specifying a bolt. These are, diameter, length from under side 
 of head to end of bolt, and length of thread measured from the 
 end of the bolt. 
 
 A tap bolt is a bolt which makes use of a part of the machine 
 to take the place of a nut, as shown in Fig. 114. To be sure that 
 the two pieces will be held firmly together, the distance AB must 
 be less than the thickness of the flange.
 
 BOLTS AND 
 
 Studs. A stud bolt or stud is a cylindrical bar having threads 
 on both ends (Fig. 115). Studs are used when there is not room 
 enough for through bolts, and where there is danger of a tap 
 bolt rusting in. Cylinder heads for steam or water machinery 
 are familiar examples. In such cases the heads have to be taken 
 off frequently, and if tap bolts were 
 used, the threads might rust in, and 
 break when an attempt to remove 
 them was made. If successfully re- 
 moved several times, the thread would 
 be worn so as to become loose and 
 render the keeping of a tight joint 
 difficult. When a stud is put in place 
 it becomes part of the casting, and 
 the wear then comes on the nut and 
 stud, both of which are made of 
 wrought iron. The material will stand 
 the wear much better than cast iron. A small amount of oil 
 on the outer end of the stud will prevent the nut from, rusting 
 on. 
 
 Threaded Holes. Holes for bolts and studs are generally 
 threaded by using taps. Machinist taps come in sets of three, 
 
 Fig //7 
 
 designated as taper, plug, and bottoming taps (Fig. 116). The 
 operation is as follows: First a hole is made with a drill having 
 a diameter about equal to the root diameter of the screw. Such 
 a drill is called a tap drill. The thread is then cut by inserting 
 and turning in the taps illustrated, and in the order given. The 
 use of the bottoming tap is often omitted, as it is seldom neces- 
 sary to have threads to the very bottom of the hole (the reader 
 is referred to catalogs of machinists' tools for further informa-
 
 52 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 tion). Unless it is desired to have a stud jam at the bottom of 
 a hole, clearance, CD, should be allowed, as shown in Fig. 117. 
 The depth of the hole is the distance A B. If necessary the 
 
 Plat Fillisf-er Head 
 
 Oral Pi/lister Head 
 
 =I.64/I-.OO9 
 
 I O ," C-- .66A-.002 
 I _Jj_i O- .173 A+. 015 
 
 2/1 -.003 
 
 - 008) + /. 739 
 J73A +.0/5 
 
 Fig. 
 
 thread may be carried to the bottom of the hole and even the 
 drill point may be ground off so that a flat bottom hole may be 
 obtained as in Fig. 118. This will prevent the drill from pointing 
 or breaking through, as indicated by the dotted lines. A better 
 
 D 
 
 / 
 
 4- 
 
 ft 
 
 3 
 
 e 
 
 7 
 /6 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 16 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 e 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 7 
 
 /6 
 
 / 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 16 
 
 ff~ 
 
 4- 
 
 7e 
 
 G 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 1* 
 
 s5 
 
 3 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 /6 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 ~6 
 
 * 
 <? 
 
 7 
 
 e 
 
 /s 
 
 1* 
 
 method is to put a boss on the casting opposite the hole, and 
 then use a regular drill and plug tap (Fig. 119). 
 
 Machine Screws. Small screws are made with a variety of 
 forms of heads. They are especially adapted for use with small 
 parts of machines. Fig. 120 shows the various forms of heads, 
 and the proportions as recommended by the American Society 
 of Mechanical Engineers. The sizes of machine screws are
 
 BOLTS AND SCREWS 
 
 53 
 
 designated by numbers. Diameters range from .060 inches to 
 .450 inches. 
 
 Cap Screws. For many purposes bolts having different 
 dimensions from the U. S. Standard are desirable. Hexagonal 
 and square cap screws are shown in Figs. 121 and 122. The 
 distance across flats is less than the U. S. Standard, and the 
 thickness is greater. Cap screws are also made with heads similar 
 to those shown for machine screws. Cap screws are designated 
 by their diameter in inches. The diameters are in even fractions 
 of an inch, starting at l /i". 
 
 Cap Nuts. - Where an especially finished appearance is de- 
 sired, cap nuts may 
 be used to conceal 
 the ends of studs. 
 They are frequently 
 seen on polished cyl- 
 inder heads, and similar places. Several forms of cap nuts are 
 shown in Figs. 123, 124, and 125. 
 
 Set Screws. For holding pulleys on shafts, and otherwise 
 preventing relative motion, set screws may be used. Several 
 forms are illustrated. Any combination of point and head may 
 
 /V= l/.S.SM. M> Thds. per inch. 
 
 Fig. I. 
 
 Fig. /26 
 
 fig. J2d 
 
 Fig. 131 
 
 be obtained. Some proportions are shown in Figs. 126 to 131. 
 A projecting set screw on a revolving pulley is a source of great 
 danger, and should be avoided. The many forms of headless 
 and hollow set screws on the market render the use of other 
 forms unnecessary in such cases. 
 
 The relative holding power of the different forms of ends of 
 set screw are given by Professor Lanza in the A. S. M. E. " Trans- 
 actions," Volume 10. Average results of tests on four kinds are 
 as follows:
 
 54 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 A. Flat end, 9 /ie inch diameter, 2064 pounds 
 
 B. End rounded, l / z inch radius, 2912 pounds 
 
 C. End rounded, */4 inch radius, 2573 pounds 
 
 D. Cup shaped end, 2470 pounds 
 
 The set screws were all 5 / 8 inches in diameter, and were tightened 
 with a pull of 75 pounds on a 12 inch wrench. 
 
 Locking Devices. The vibration of machinery often causes 
 nuts to become loose if they are not provided with some form of 
 locking device. The commonest method is to use two nuts. 
 They may be full size, or one of the arrangements shown in Fig. 
 
 rig. 132 
 
 132. The castle nut illustrated forms a good method. Lock 
 washers consisting of a piece of sheet metal are effective. One 
 corner is turned down, and another corner is turned up, as 
 illustrated. 
 
 The following table gives the dimensions for U. S. Standard 
 bolt heads and nuts.
 
 BOLTS AND SCREWS 
 
 55 
 
 DIMENSIONS OF U. S. STANDABD BOLT HEADS AND NUTS 
 
 d 
 
 Diameter 
 of Bolt 
 
 W 
 
 Flats or 
 Short 
 Diameter 
 
 c 
 
 Corners 
 or Long 
 Diameter 
 
 d 
 
 Thickness 
 of Nut 
 
 r 
 
 Thickness 
 of 
 Bolt Head 
 
 C S 
 
 Corners 
 or Long 
 Diameter 
 
 V4 
 
 / 
 
 37 /64 
 
 V* 
 
 '/ 
 
 Z3 /32 
 
 Vl6 
 
 13 /32 
 
 U /16 
 
 Vl6 
 
 19 /64 
 
 27 /32 
 
 3 /8 
 
 /16 
 
 81 /64 
 
 V 
 
 tt /M 
 
 31 /32 
 
 Vl6 
 
 /M 
 
 29 /32 
 
 7 /16 
 
 25 /64 
 
 ! 7 /64 
 
 '/I 
 
 7 /8 
 
 1V64 
 
 */ 
 
 Vl6 
 
 1V4 
 
 Vie 
 
 31 /32 
 
 1V 
 
 Vl6 
 
 31 /64 
 
 W 8 
 
 Vs 
 
 iVu 
 
 l 1S /64 
 
 5 /8 
 
 17 /32 
 
 1V2 
 
 3 /4 
 
 1V4 
 
 ! 29 /64 
 
 3 /4 
 
 B /8 
 
 1V4 
 
 7 /8 
 
 F/16 
 
 l/64 
 
 7 /8 
 
 23 /32 
 
 /M 
 
 1 
 
 l B /8 
 
 l ? /8 
 
 
 13 /16 
 
 2V 
 
 IVs 
 
 1 13 /16 
 
 2P/ M 
 
 Vs 
 
 29 /32 
 
 2 9 / 16 
 
 1V4 
 
 2 
 
 2V i. 
 
 V4 
 
 1 
 
 2 S3 /64 
 
 ! 3 /8 
 
 2Vie 
 
 2"/32 
 
 3 /8 
 
 i/.i 
 
 3 3 /32 
 
 iVi 
 
 2/8 
 
 2V4 
 
 v 
 
 IV 16 
 
 3 23 /64 
 
 ! 5 /8 
 
 2'/16 
 
 2 15 /16 
 
 ! 5 /8 
 
 P/32 
 
 3*/8 
 
 ! 3 /4 
 
 2V4 
 
 3V 16 
 
 W4 
 
 ! 3 /8 
 
 3 57 /64 
 
 l ? /8 
 
 2 16 /16 
 
 3 13 /32 
 
 l ? /8 
 
 ! 15 /32 
 
 4 3 / 16 
 
 2 
 
 3Vs 
 
 3 5 /8 
 
 2 
 
 P/16 
 
 4^/64
 
 56 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 DEPTH OP TAPPED HOLES AND DISTANCE FOR SCREW TO ENTER 
 
 d 
 
 Diameter 
 of Screw 
 
 D 
 
 Diameter 
 of Tap 
 Drill 
 
 B 
 
 Depth 
 of Hole 
 
 C 
 
 Allowance 
 for 
 Drill Point 
 
 A 
 
 Distance 
 for Screw 
 to Enter 
 
 v 
 
 /. 
 
 Vl6 
 
 Vl6 
 
 3 /8 
 
 Vl6 
 
 17 /32 
 
 Vl6 
 
 8 /64 
 
 Vl6 
 
 3 /8 
 
 Vl6 
 
 n /M 
 
 3 /32 
 
 Vl6 
 
 Vl6 
 
 3 /8 
 
 3 /4 
 
 7 /64 
 
 5 /8 
 
 Vi 
 
 "/64 
 
 13 /16 
 
 Vs 
 
 "/16 
 
 Vi 
 
 31 /64 
 
 15 /16 
 
 9 /64 
 
 13 /16 
 
 V 
 
 17 /32 
 
 1 
 
 5 /32 
 
 7 /8 
 
 3 /4 
 
 /64 
 
 W4 
 
 Vl6 
 
 1 
 
 Vs 
 
 3 /4 
 
 iVi 
 
 7 /32 
 
 1V4 
 
 1 
 
 55 /64 
 
 1V 8 
 
 V4 
 
 ! 3 /8 
 
 iVt 
 
 61 /64 
 
 IV 4 
 
 9 /32 
 
 1V2 
 
 1V 
 
 1V64 
 
 2 
 
 8 /H 
 
 1V4 
 
 !/ 
 
 l n /64 
 
 2V4 
 
 U /32 
 
 1V8 
 
 i/i 
 
 ! 19 /64 
 
 2'/2 
 
 3 /8 
 
 2V 
 
 !/ 
 
 l"/32 
 
 2 B /8 
 
 13 /32 
 
 2>/4 
 
 l'/4 
 
 IV 
 
 2 3 / 4 
 
 Vl6 
 
 2V. 
 
 iVi 
 
 ! 5 /8 
 
 3 
 
 15 /32 
 
 2V 
 
 2 
 
 P 3 /32 
 
 3'/8 
 
 7i 
 
 2V 4
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 RIVETING 
 
 Riveting. Since machines and structures cannot be made in 
 one piece some means of fastening the parts together must be 
 used. For many purposes where a permanent fastening is re- 
 quired, rivets are used. A rivet is a bar of metal having a head 
 made on one end and a length sufficient to allow forming a head 
 on the other end after being put into place. The holes for rivets 
 may be either punched or drilled. As punching injures the 
 metal, drilled holes are better for boiler or other pressure work. 
 
 f>g. /33 
 
 Holes are made Vie inch larger diameter than the rivets used in 
 them. Thus a one-inch rivet is 15 /ie inch diameter before driving. 
 
 The computations for pitch and efficiency of joints, matters 
 relating to design, are beyond the scope of this work, but the 
 following articles will suffice for drawing purposes. 
 
 Rivet Heads. The forms of rivet heads are shown in Figs. 
 133, 134, and 135. The countersunk head and the button head 
 are illustrated in Fig. 133. These forms are used for structural 
 work. For pressure work the cone head or pan head of Fig. 134 
 may be used, or the common form of Fig. 135. 
 
 Lap Joints. When two plates lap over each other and are 
 held by a row of rivets as in Fig. 136 it is called a single riveted 
 lap joint. A double riveted lap joint is shown in Fig. 137. The 
 distance between the centers of two rivets in the same row is 
 
 57
 
 58 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 called the pitch. The distance from the center line of the rivets 
 to the edge of the plate is called the lap. The lap is commonly 
 made equal to one and one half times the diameter of the rivet. 
 
 /3 7 
 
 The distance from the center of a rivet in one line to the center 
 of a rivet in the next line is called the diagonal pitch and may be 
 found from the formula: 
 
 P' = 
 
 Either chain riveting (Fig. 138) or staggered riveting (Fig. 139) 
 may be used when there are several rows of rivets. 
 
 fig. 138 
 
 . /39 
 
 Butt Joints. Three forms of butt joints are shown in Figs. 
 140, 141, and 142. In Fig. 140 a single butt-strap having a thick- 
 ness of about one and one fourth times the thickness of the plates
 
 RIVETING 
 
 59 
 
 may be used. Figs. 141 and 142 show single and double riveted 
 butt joints with two butt-straps. In such cases the butt-straps 
 may be Vie inch thinner than the plates. 
 When three plates come together they must be arranged so 
 
 Section A-A 
 
 r/g. 
 
 as to maintain a tight joint. One method used is shown in 
 Fig. 143. In order to obtain a fit one of the plates must be 
 thinned out. 
 
 Calking. For many purposes rivets must make a leak tight 
 joint as well as hold the plates together. To assist in this a
 
 60 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 blunt chisel is used to force or pound the edge of the plate down. 
 This is called calking and makes a water or steam tight joint 
 
 113k. 
 
 between the plates. The bevel of about 75 shown is to make 
 the calking easier. 
 
 Miscellaneous Connections. Some miscellaneous connections 
 are shown in Figs. 144 to 147. Angles may be used as in Figs. 
 
 144 and 147 or one of the plates may be bent as in Figs. 145 and 
 146. In this case the radius of curvature (r) may be about two 
 and one half times the thickness of the plate. Also note that a 
 short straight part (x) should be provided to allow easy calking 
 
 FCIIT 
 
 Angle (l_) Channel^ } Beam (I ) Z-Bar (Z ) 
 
 Pig. 150 
 
 Tee (T) 
 
 (Fig. 145) . When drawing to a small scale thin sections are some- 
 times blacked in as shown in Figs. 148 and 149, which also il- 
 lustrate methods of closing the ends of cylindrical tanks. With 
 rounded ends the radius of curvature may be taken equal to the 
 diameter of the tank.
 
 RIVETING 
 
 61 
 
 Rolled Steel Shapes. For many constructions, rolled steel 
 shapes are used. The dimensions and weights as well as other 
 properties can best be obtained from the handbooks issued by 
 
 CONVENTIONAL S/GNS fV/f RirT/N6 
 
 
 Shop 
 
 Fie/d 
 
 Ccn/stferyt/rr/r and f-~/affened 
 
 Titv Full Heads 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 Inside 
 
 Outside 
 
 BotoSides 
 
 High 
 
 Q 
 
 Q 
 
 Q 
 
 Countersunk & Chipped 
 /ns/de or Opposite side 
 
 8) 
 
 
 
 Countersunk S Ch/ppect 
 Outeic/e or This Side 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 ij'High 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 Coufersunk 3 Chipped 
 Both Sides 
 
 3 
 
 m 
 
 s'High 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 ^ 
 
 Fig. I5/ 
 
 the steel companies. The names of a few of the common sections 
 are given in connection with Fig. 150. 
 
 The pitch of rivets for structural purposes may be taken at 
 from three to six inches. The distance from the center of the 
 rivet to the edge of the plate should generally be about two times 
 the rivet diameter. The pitch for various sizes of rivets may be 
 taken from the table given below. 
 
 MINIMUM RIVET SPACING 
 
 Diameter of Ri 
 
 Pitch 
 
 is 
 
 i^A 
 
 The Osborn system of conventional representation for rivets 
 is shown in Fig. 151.
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 WORKING DRAWINGS 
 
 Cksses of Drawings. The origin of a drawing is of interest, 
 and a knowledge of how drawings are produced is essential. 
 Roughly drawings may be divided into two classes; detail draw- 
 ings and assembly drawings. These names are sufficiently de- 
 scriptive in a general way. Drawings are sometimes made from 
 a machine or part by measuring and sketching. The usual 
 source of a detail drawing is the designer's board. Here the 
 whole machine is laid out to scale in a more or less complete 
 manner, the relation of one part to another is shown, and such 
 fixed dimensions as are necessary are determined. The shapes 
 of the various parts as required for strength and motion are 
 worked out and drawn. From such drawings the detail drafts- 
 man works and finishes the drawings of the separate parts. 
 
 A detail drawing shows each piece separately and completely 
 defines it (Fig. 152). The number of views is determined by 
 what is necessary to show the shape and size of the object. A 
 pin, shaft, or bolt can generally be shown in one view, while a 
 casting may require two, three, or more views together with 
 sectional and auxiliary views. The main views should always 
 be arranged in strict conformity to the rules of projection. The 
 third quadrant is used exclusively for this purpose. Auxiliary 
 views and sections may be placed in other positions but explana- 
 tory notes should always be used to define them as explained in 
 Chapter X. 
 
 The size of paper and the scales to use have been treated in 
 other chapters. Use a scale that will show the object clearly 
 and that will not require crowding of the dimensions. In general 
 it is better not to use more than one scale on the same sheet. 
 To this end large and small pieces would not be put on the same 
 sheet. There are many concerns where each part is drawn on 
 a sheet by itself. The character of the work will determine the 
 practice in this respect. 
 
 62
 
 WORKING DRAWINGS 
 
 63 
 
 It is generally well to draw large castings separately and to 
 group small parts together as: 
 
 Small Castings, 
 
 Bronze and Composition Castings, 
 
 Forgings, 
 
 Bolts and Screws. 
 
 Fig. 152 
 
 Special Detail Drawings. Special detail drawings are some- 
 times made for the different classes of workmen. These might 
 be classed as follows: 
 
 Pattern Drawings, 
 
 Forging Drawings, 
 
 Machinist's Drawings, 
 
 Stock Drawings. 
 
 There are many advantages to this system where a large num- 
 ber of parts are made as each workman is given only such in- 
 formation as concerns him. As pattern dimensions are used 
 only when the pattern is made or for alterations they complicate 
 the drawing and can better be left off the machinist's drawing. 
 One method is to put the pattern dimensions and information on 
 the tracing in pencil, make several blueprints, and erase the pencil
 
 64 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 f- 
 
 i 
 
 information from the tracing. Gasolene applied with a soft 
 cloth is excellent for this purpose. For forgings two separate 
 drawings will be necessary, one for the blacksmith and one for 
 the machinist. The saving in time will make up for the expense 
 of the extra drawing in most cases.
 
 WORKING DRAWINGS 65 
 
 How to make a Drawing. A detail drawing is started by 
 first locating the main center lines as shown in Fig. 153 for the 
 necessary views. Next " block in" the fixed dimensions in all 
 views and from them work out the shape of the object. The 
 small circles, fillets, etc. should be drawn last. Figs. 153 to 158 
 show the drawing for a slide valve in the various stages of making. 
 
 After completing the drawing in pencil it is ready to be inked 
 on paper or traced. 
 
 Tracing. Most drawings are now inked on tracing cloth. 
 This is a translucent linen cloth. There are many grades, some 
 nearly transparent. One side of the cloth is generally shiny or 
 glazed and the other dull. Either side may be used but the dull 
 side is to be preferred. The cloth is tacked down over the pencil 
 drawing and the lines inked in as though they were on the cloth. 
 The surface of the cloth should be rubbed over with powdered 
 chalk and then the chalk thoroughly removed. A clean blotter 
 will serve the same purpose. The fine thread running at the 
 edges of the cloth should be torn off before using to prevent 
 wrinkling. As the cloth is absorbent it should be protected from 
 moisture. 
 
 Order for inking Lines. The weight of line to be used has 
 been discussed in the first chapter. First ink the center lines 
 using a fine dot and dash line. The order of inking then is: 
 
 1. Small circular arcs and circles. 
 
 2. Large circular arcs and circles. 
 
 3. Irregular curved lines. 
 
 4. Straight horizontal lines. 
 
 5. Straight vertical lines. 
 
 6. Dotted circular arcs. 
 
 7. Dotted lines. 
 
 8. Witness and dimension lines. 
 
 9. Dimensions, notes, title. 
 10. Section lining. 
 
 When a large or complicated drawing is to be inked it is ad- 
 visable to ink one view at a time or to start only so much as can 
 be completed on the same day. If a view is left uncompleted it 
 will generally be found very difficult to join the various lines, 
 because the cloth is very sensitive to atmospheric changes which 
 cause it to stretch.
 
 66 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Assembly Drawings. An assembly drawing shows the parts 
 of a machine in their proper relation to one another. There are 
 many kinds of assembly drawings, some of which will be described. 
 
 An Outline or Setting drawing is frequently made to show the 
 appearance of the machine, give center distances, and overall 
 dimensions. Such drawings are used to illustrate the machine 
 to prospective customers, to lay out the foundation, and for locat- 
 
 rig. 159 
 
 ing the machine in its building. Fig. 159 shows one form of such 
 a drawing. 
 
 An Assembly Working Drawing is often made when only a few 
 of the machines are to be constructed. Such a drawing might 
 contain a number of part views or sections. It would be com- 
 pletely dimensioned so that no separate or detail drawings would 
 be required. Fig. 175 shows such a drawing. 
 
 Part Assembly Drawings are sometimes made giving a few 
 pieces in their proper relation to each other and either partly 
 or completely dimensioned. When completely dimensioned no 
 further detail drawings are made. 
 
 Assembly drawings made to show the sizes, location, and method 
 of fastening pipes and wires are called piping or wiring diagrams 
 or drawings, depending upon how completely they are figured. 
 
 Erection Drawings are an important class of assembly drawings. 
 They show the proper order of putting the parts together, dimen-
 
 WORKING DRAWINGS 
 
 67 
 
 Pig. /GO 
 
 sions, such as center distances, which must be exact, give the 
 location of oil holes, valves, switches, etc., and methods of making 
 adjustments.
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Diagram Drawings are used by many concerns. These com- 
 prise a sectional or external view of the whole of the machine 
 upon which the parts can be numbered or named. Such a draw- 
 ing frequently contains a list of the parts, drawing numbers, 
 pattern numbers, materials, weight, and other information. 
 
 Outline drawings are often used for catalogs, advertising, and 
 similar purposes. Some of the points to be considered are given 
 
 Fig. /6I 
 
 Fig. 162 
 
 rig. 163 
 
 in the following list. The one upon which emphasis must be put 
 will depend upon the use to which the drawing is to be put. 
 
 1. Get the important points. 
 
 2. Sense of proportion. 
 
 3. Suggestion. 
 
 4. Simplicity (few lines). 
 
 5. Record peculiarities in shape or design. 
 
 6. Use notes if necessary. 
 
 7. Number of machine. 
 
 8. Name of manufacturer. 
 
 9. Trade names. 
 
 10. Use of shading. 
 
 11. Not necessarily to scale. 
 
 Show Drawings are sometimes made. These are often in the 
 nature of a picture in which the center lines and dimensions are 
 left off (Fig. 160) . Line shading as explained in a later chapter is 
 often used. A good effect may sometimes be obtained by mass 
 shading with a soft pencil, using the dull side of the tracing cloth. 
 For more particular work on paper, india ink tinting applied with 
 a brush can be used.
 
 WORKING DRAWINGS 
 
 69 
 
 Exceptions to True Projection. There are many cases where 
 true projection is departed from in the interests of simplicity and 
 clearness. Figs. 161, 162, and 163 show a few cases. The slot 
 in the screw is drawn at 45 in the top view but is not projected 
 
 
 \ \ 
 
 
 oil) I'- 
 
 1 SJi iji 
 
 i!i !;: II! ! 
 
 i 
 
 ll 1: i 
 
 mi 
 
 Fig. 164 
 
 Fig. 165 Fig. 166 
 
 to the elevation. The same practice is followed for holes and 
 pins. The location of bolt holes is another illustration. The 
 front view of Fig. 164 shows the true projection of the bolt holes. 
 The front view of Fig. 165 shows the preferable method which 
 
 Fig 167 
 
 locates the centers of the bolt holes at a distance apart equal to 
 the diameter of the circle of drilling. In such cases the other 
 holes need not be projected as they add nothing to the information 
 conveyed by the drawing. When holes are drilled as in Fig. 165 
 they are said to be "Two Up" or off centers, and when located 
 as in Fig. 166 they are said to be "One Up" or on centers. Pipe 
 flanges on elbows and fittings are usually drilled "Two Up" and
 
 70 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 with four, eight, or some multiple of four holes, so that the flanges 
 can be turned at right angles. 
 
 Other exceptions to true projection are discussed in the chapter 
 on sections. 
 
 Blueprints. The object of making tracings is to provide a 
 convenient means for obtaining several copies of the original 
 drawing. The most common method is by the blueprinting 
 process. Blueprint paper is paper which has been coated with 
 iron salts which are sensitive to light. The method of making 
 blueprints is as follows: 
 
 Place the tracing with the right side or inked side next to the 
 glass of a printing frame as shown in Fig. 167. Next place a 
 piece of blueprint paper on the tracing with the coated side down. 
 Follow this with the .felt pad and close the frame. Expose to 
 the direct sunlight as indicated in Fig. 168. The length of the 
 exposure varies from 30 seconds in strong sunlight with rapid 
 printing paper to three or four minutes under the same conditions 
 with slow printing paper. The time can best be found by trial, 
 as the age of the paper and the brightness of the light all exert 
 an influence. After exposing, the paper should be removed and 
 thoroughly washed. The excess water may be blotted off and 
 the print hung up to dry. New paper has a yellow color on the 
 coated side. After exposure this changes to a gray-bronze except 
 where the lines of the tracing prevent the light from reaching it. 
 
 Electric light is very generally used in the larger mechanical 
 factories for making blueprints. Machines for this purpose as 
 well as many other methods of duplication are described in draw- 
 ing supply catalogs to which the reader is referred.
 
 CHAPTER X 
 SECTIONS 
 
 Sectional Views. Probably the most useful form of con- 
 ventional representation is the sectional view obtained by an 
 
 rig. 169 
 
 imaginary cutting plane described in Chapter IV. Free use 
 of sections often saves much time as well as possibility of mistakes 
 in reading drawings for constructions which have complicated 
 
 Fig. / 71 
 
 Fig. 17 2 
 
 cores. The choice of views should be made with care and for a 
 definite purpose, never for appearances. There are many special 
 sections, some of which are described in this chapter. An article 
 
 71
 
 72 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 by the author, "Sections of Ribs and Symmetrical Parts," in 
 " Machinery/' June, 1915, gives further applications. 
 
 Broken and Revolved Sections. When a long piece of uni- 
 form cross section is to be represented, a larger scale can be used 
 
 Fig. 173 
 
 by "breaking" the piece. The manner of breaking generally 
 indicates the form of cross section and material as in Fig. 169. 
 The break is made free hand but should be carefully done. The 
 two sides should appear to match, that is, if the sectioning comes 
 on the upper side of one half it should come on the lower side of 
 
 'A 
 
 r- 
 
 Sect i en A A' ,',-> 
 d/rcct/on of arrow 
 
 mm\\ 
 
 Fig. 174 
 
 the other. A similar method of "set in" sections is often used 
 for such conditions as are present with wrench handles, pulley 
 arms, brackets, hand wheels, and rods. Figs. 170 to 173 show 
 some examples. 
 
 Location of Sectional Views. When conditions permit, sec- 
 tional views should be placed according to the laws of projection
 
 SECTIONS 
 
 73 
 
 as explained in Chapter IV, and are drawn in the same manner 
 as the other views by assuming a part of the machine or parts to 
 have been removed. When many sections are required or other
 
 74 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 reasons make it necessary to place the sectional views in another 
 location, arrows and notes should be used to explain them 
 
 as shown in Fig. 174. 
 Extra sectional views 
 are often very useful 
 in explaining parts of a 
 machine or details of a 
 part. 
 
 Since the cutting 
 plane is imaginary it 
 need not be continu- 
 ous; thus several sec- 
 tions may be used and 
 the views represented 
 as though occurring on 
 a single plane. This is 
 illustrated in Fig. 175, 
 where the cutting 
 plane is changed as 
 shown in the top view. 
 Thus the front sec- 
 tion is taken on the 
 plane A, B, C, D, E, 
 F, and the side section 
 on a plane through the 
 center. 
 
 Objects not Sectioned. When a full view will serve the same 
 purpose just as well a sectional view should not be used. This 
 is true in the case of shafts, bolts, nuts, screws, rivets, keys, pulley 
 
 ,: ', : ' : :"" 
 
 
 
 Fig. /77 
 
 179 
 
 arms, etc., which are very seldom drawn in section except when 
 the cutting plane is at right angles to the long dimension. This 
 treatment of a section is shown in Fig. 176.
 
 SECTIONS 
 
 75 
 
 Dotted Lines on Sectional Views. Very often a sectional 
 view contains only the outline of the sectioned surfaces and the 
 full lines which appear. How much of the part behind the plane 
 
 Fig. 1 79 Fig.ldO F/g./QI 
 
 of the section should be represented must be determined for each 
 particular case. When an object is represented by a view made 
 up of one half in section and one half exterior most or all of the 
 
 Fig. 162 
 
 dotted lines may be omitted from both halves, as was done in 
 Fig. 175. 
 
 Sections of Ribs and Symmetrical Parts. Ribs, arms, and 
 gear teeth are not ordinarily sectioned even though they appear
 
 76 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 on the plane of the section. Figs. 177 and 178 illustrate such 
 cases. In Fig. 177 the plane MN passes through the ribs, but is 
 not sectioned in the other view as it would give a false impression 
 of solidity. In Fig. 178 the true projection without sectioning 
 the rib is shown at A, while the usual conventional section is 
 shown .at B. 
 
 The representation of a cylinder head in Figs. 179, 180, and 181, 
 shows a similar case. A true section on the plane AB is given 
 in Fig. 179. In Fig. 180 the section is taken on CD and revolved 
 into the position of AB. The bolt holes and lugs are then located 
 at their true distances from the center. By this means one view 
 could be made to represent the cylinder head by adding a note 
 to give the number of lugs. An alternate method is shown in 
 Fig. 181, where the section FE is revolved. The idea in all cases 
 is to avoid a view which might in any way be confusing and to 
 convey the true shape clearly. 
 
 When a rib occurs on the plane of a section and it is necessary 
 to distinguish it, coarse sectioning may be employed as in the 
 cone pulley of Fig. 182 where the ribs are sectioned but alternate 
 lines are omitted. A note giving the number and thickness of 
 the ribs would allow the end view to be dispensed with. Observe 
 that the half end view is bounded by the center line and not by 
 a full line, as the pulley has not been actually cut in half.
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 DIMENSIONING 
 
 Purpose of Dimensions. The purpose of dimensions is to 
 give the necessary figures for constructing machine parts and 
 putting them together. A drawing gives the shape of an object, 
 
 Fig. 183 
 
 the dimensions tell the size. These are two operations and both 
 should be kept in mind. 
 
 Dimension Lines. Dimension lines show where the figures 
 apply to the drawing. They are terminated by arrow heads. 
 The arrow heads should be about twice as long as they are wide. 
 
 Fig. 184- 
 
 Fig. /8S 
 
 Fig. 183 shows the construction of an enlarged arrow head, and 
 its proportions. Fine full red ink lines are sometimes used for 
 dimension, center, and witness lines. The arrow heads and 
 figures are always black. The figures and notes should always 
 be placed so as to read from the lower or right hand side of the 
 
 77
 
 78 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 drawing. Never use slant fraction lines. In most cases it is 
 considered bad practice to place the figures upright as shown in 
 Fig. 184 where the figures may be easily read with the wrong- 
 dimension lines. Fig. 185 shows a better arrangement. The 
 witness and dimension lines should be as fine as possible so as 
 not to conflict with the lines of the drawing. In the interest of 
 clearness there should be as few lines as possible crossing each 
 
 /6Thd.U.SS 
 
 i Di 
 
 - 
 
 -f-i 
 
 r 
 
 L 
 
 Ori// 
 
 84 
 
 Fig. 186 
 
 other. The center lines and object lines have only one purpose 
 and should never be used as dimension lines. Generally the 
 dimension lines can be kept outside of the views, thus keeping the 
 size and shape of the object separate. In such cases place the 
 larger dimensions outside the smaller ones as in Figs. 186 and 
 188. Fig. 187 shows a poorly dimensioned drawing of a pump 
 plunger and Fig. 188 the same piece properly dimensioned. Fin- 
 ished surfaces are ordinarily indicated by a letter "/" placed 
 across the line which represents the surface to be machined. 
 
 Elements of Dimensioning. Constructions can be separated 
 into parts and these parts can then be divided into geometrical
 
 DIMENSIONING 
 
 79 
 
 solids. Each of the solids can then be dimensioned and their 
 relation to each other fixed. Figs. 189 to 193 show a prism, a 
 pyramid, a cone, and a cylinder with dimensions. Figs. 194, 
 195, and 196 show combinations. Note that the same location 
 of dimensions is maintained. In dimensioning cylinders give the 
 diameters on the elevation as in Fig. 195. Placing of the five 
 
 Fig. 187 
 
 Fig. 188 
 
 diameters on the end view would result in crowding as well as 
 inconvenience in reading figures placed at an angle. Always 
 give a diameter in preference to a radius if the part is a complete 
 cylinder. For quarter rounds, fillets, and part circles give the 
 radius. 
 
 General Rules. To dimension a drawing successfully the 
 construction of the pattern, machining, fitting, and putting to- 
 gether of the machine must be gone over. It is necessary to keep 
 constantly in mind the person to whom the drawing is addressed 
 and the purpose for which it is to be used.
 
 80 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Hints: 
 
 Do not hurry, 
 
 Give sizes of pieces for the pattern maker, 
 
 Give sizes and finish for the machinist, 
 
 Give assembly dimensions, 
 
 Give office dimensions, 
 
 Give notes where needed. 
 
 m 194. 
 
 Fig. 195 
 
 It is necessary to remember that surfaces and not lines are 
 being located. The dimensions of the piece must be kept in 
 mind. Detail drawings are generally made to serve both pattern 
 maker and machinist, and the figures indicate the size of the 
 finished piece. The pattern maker is left to make required 
 allowances for finish, shrink, and draft. In the case of forgings 
 two drawings are sometimes made, one for the blacksmith giv- 
 ing the rough sizes, and another for the machinist giving the 
 finished sizes. 
 
 Systems of Dimensioning. Four general systems of dimen- 
 sioning may be mentioned as follows: 
 
 1. All figures outside of the object lines. 
 
 2. All figures inside of the object lines. 
 
 3. All figures given from two reference lines at right angles to each 
 
 other. 
 
 4. A combination of the preceding three systems.
 
 DIMENSIONING 
 
 81 
 
 The four systems are illustrated in Figs. 197 to 200. The 
 first method is to be favored as the dimension lines and figures 
 are kept separate from the interior and allow details to be easily 
 seen. The size and 
 shape are separated. 
 The second method 
 may be used when 
 there is little detail 
 within the view. It 
 preserves the outline 
 of the view but often 
 there is confusion due 
 to the crossing of the 
 lines and crowding of 
 the figures. The third method is particularly adapted to plate 
 work and laying out where holes must be carefully located. 
 
 The fourth method is the one generally used but making it 
 
 II 
 
 ! i 
 
 t 
 * 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1#- 
 at 
 
 
 te 
 
 **-D 
 
 \L 
 
 
 Fig. 196 
 
 . I9e 
 
 conform to the first system by placing dimensions outside when- 
 ever it is conveniently possible. 
 
 Location of Dimensions. Facility in manufacture should be 
 a motto in dimensioning. The figures must be so placed as to be 
 easily found and perfectly clear in their meaning when found. 
 Select that view which most completely defines the object and 
 start with it first. If an assembly drawing, dimension only one 
 piece at a time and finish all views of that one piece before starting 
 another. Put on similar dimensions at the same time, as diame- 
 ters, lengths, etc. Do not jump from one piece to another. Work 
 from the more important dimensions to those of less importance.
 
 82 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 See that all center distances are given. Consider the effect of 
 location upon ease of reading the drawing. Similar pieces should 
 be dimensioned in exactly the same way. Fig. 201 shows a gland, 
 
 g. /99 
 
 Fig. 200 
 
 Fig. 202 a pump valve, and Fig. 203 a cylinder head. They are 
 all similar pieces and the dimensions are located in the same 
 places on each. In the three figures the similar dimensions are 
 indicated by the letters A, B, C, etc. 
 
 By observing such methods a system of dimensioning can be 
 
 Pig. 20 / 
 
 employed which will save a great deal of time and many mistakes 
 and omissions. It is seldom necessary to repeat the same dimen- 
 sion on a drawing. Drilling is generally best located in the 
 view where it shows in plan, that is, in the view where it is laid 
 out. Diameters are always clearer when shown on a section
 
 DIMENSIONING 
 
 83 
 
 or elevation rather than on an end view. The drilling for flanges 
 is dimensioned by giving the diameter of the bolt circle and 
 the size of bolt holes or bolts. The holes are understood to be 
 equally spaced unless noted otherwise. 
 
 Shafting. Shafting should be dimensioned by giving the 
 diameters and lengths together with the sizes of keyways and 
 pins and their location. Shafting is made from various grades 
 of wrought iron and steel. For many purposes cold rolled shafting 
 is generally used. This is shafting which has been cleaned of 
 scale and rolled under pressure. It can be used without the 
 
 I 
 
 Fig. 202 
 
 necessity for turning and is considerably strengthened by the 
 surface skin which comes from the rolling process. Hot rolled 
 shafting is black and must be turned to size before using. Usual 
 sizes are: 
 
 NOMINAL DIAMETERS OF SHAFTING 
 
 l'/4 
 
 2V, 
 
 4 
 
 . IV. 
 
 2'/4 
 
 4V, 
 
 IV 4 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 3V, 
 
 5V, 
 
 2V4 
 
 3V2 
 
 6 
 
 These are nominal sizes and are Vie inch larger than actual 
 diameter. Thus a 2-inch shaft is I 15 /i6" actual diameter. Com- 
 mon lengths vary up to 24 feet. Special shafts have to be forged 
 of steel suitable for the particular purpose. A shaft drawing is 
 shown in Fig. 204 with the positions of the dimensions.
 
 84 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Tapers. Various methods are in use for designating tapers. 
 Figs. 205, 206, and 207 show ways of indicating the two diameters 
 and the length. Sometimes a note is employed giving the taper 
 
 per foot of length as, "V/' per foot" When the slope is con- 
 siderable it may be given as 1 : 1, indicating a 45 slope. In other 
 cases the angle may be given in degrees. In addition there are 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 E i- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^tf 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 2O4 
 
 a number of standard tapers in use such as B & S (Brown & 
 Sharpe), Morse Tapers, Reed Lathe Center Tapers, Jarno Tapers, 
 and Sellers Tapers. In such cases the taper is indicated by a 
 number which fixes the three dimensions, large diameter, small 
 diameter, and length. A machinist's handbook should be con- 
 sulted for complete information.
 
 DIMENSIONING 
 
 85 
 
 Small Parts. There are many small parts such as shafts, 
 pulleys, etc., which can be defined in one view by using a note 
 to give the missing dimensions. When clearness is not sacrificed 
 it is better to use this method in many cases. Small details 
 which are standardized do not need to be completely dimen- 
 sioned. This is true for bolts and screws, standard tapers, piping, 
 wire, sheet metal, rope, chain, pins, rolled steel shapes. 
 
 Methods of Finishing. In connection with dimensions the 
 limits of accuracy for all fits should be given. The method of 
 
 Fig. 205 
 
 Fig. 20 6 \Fig.e07 
 
 finishing is given in another chapter, and should be indicated 
 by a note and arrow. 
 
 1. Rough. 
 
 2. Rough turned. 
 
 3. Ground. 
 
 4. Polished. 
 
 5. Reamed. 
 
 6. Cored. 
 
 7. Running fit. 
 
 8. Loose fit. 
 
 9. Driving fit. 
 
 10. Scraped. 
 
 11. Finished. 
 
 12. Drilled. 
 
 13. Chipped. 
 
 14. Spot faced. 
 
 Checking Drawings. The checking of a drawing is one of 
 the important duties of most draftsmen. Whenever possible it 
 should be done by someone who has not worked on the drawing. 
 The first thing to do is to see if the drawing can be used without 
 unnecessary difficulty, and to see if the parts are such as will fit 
 and operate successfully. There must be clearance for moving 
 parts. Then observe if sufficient views are given to completely 
 determine the parts, and that all dimensions necessary for machin- 
 ing and erecting are given and that they are properly located. 
 Check the correctness of all figures by use of the scale and by 
 computation. All notes should contain a clear statement and
 
 86 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 be carefully located. Standard parts should be used where 
 possible. See that the fewest number of different sizes of bolts 
 and similar small parts are used. Consider the materials of 
 which the parts are made, the construction of the patterns and 
 cores, and the method of machining. A valuable article on 
 "How Machinery Materials and Supplies are Sized" is given in 
 "Machinery," February, 1916.
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 MACHINE CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Machine Operations. The parts of machines which come 
 from the foundry, forge, or rolling mill generally require finishing, 
 such as machining to size, drilling, tapping of holes, etc., before 
 they can be assembled in the machine of which they are to be a 
 part. A knowledge of what is involved in the processes of ma- 
 chining is important to the machine draftsman. The principal 
 machine operations are turning, drilling, boring, planing, and 
 milling. The machines used are lathes, drills, boring mills, 
 planers, milling machines, shapers, etc. 
 
 In order to pursue the subject of drawing with profit at least 
 
 Pig. SO 8 Fig. 2O9 
 
 one book on machine tools should be purchased and studied. 
 The advertising pages as well as the reading pages of such mag- 
 azines as "American Machinist" and "Machinery" are further 
 sources of information which should not be neglected. Every 
 opportunity should be availed of to observe and study work as 
 it is carried out in pattern shop, forge, foundry, and machine shop. 
 Such knowledge is invaluable and will often enable the draftsman 
 materially to reduce the expense of production by simplifying or 
 adapting his designs. 
 
 Drills. Drills are used for making holes of comparatively 
 small diameter. Two forms of drills are shown in Figs. 208 and 
 209. The first is a flat drill and the second a twist drill. The 
 latter is the form in general use. Drills are used in different 
 forms of machines. Look up the following in the advertising 
 pages of "American Machinist" or "Machinery": Sensitive Drill, 
 Drill Press, Multiple Drill. 
 
 87
 
 88 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 The Steam Engine. It is important for the draftsman to 
 learn the names of the parts of the steam engine. Fig. 210 shows 
 the principal parts. 
 
 Fig 
 
 1. Cylinder head. 
 
 2. Piston. 
 
 3. Casing or lagging strip. 
 
 4. Cylinder. 
 
 5. Piston rod. 
 
 6. Steam chest cover. 
 
 7. Steam port. 
 
 8. Slide valve. 
 
 9. Exhaust port. 
 
 10. Valve rod stuffing box. 
 
 11. Valve rod gland. 
 
 12. Valve rod. 
 
 13. Eccentric rod. 
 
 14. Eccentric.
 
 MACHINE CONSTRUCTION 
 
 15. Outer bearing. 
 
 16. Main shaft. 
 
 17. Flywheel. 
 
 18. Inner bearing. 
 
 19. Crank. 
 
 20. Crank pin. 
 
 Steam is admitted to alternate sides of the piston by means of 
 the slide valve which is actuated by the eccentric through the 
 eccentric rod. The piston transmits the pressure of the steam 
 
 21. Frame. 
 
 22. Crosshead pin. 
 
 23. Crosshead. 
 
 24. Crosshead guide. 
 
 25. Connecting rod. 
 
 Fiq. 
 
 Fig. 2/2 
 
 through the piston rod, crosshead, and connecting rod to the 
 crank. The crank causes the shaft to revolve, carrying with it 
 the flywheel, from which power may be transmitted by means of 
 a belt. 
 
 Pistons. Pistons are used in many forms of machines and 
 vary accordingly. Some forms are shown in Figs. 211 and 212. 
 The names of the parts for the form of steam piston shown in 
 
 Fig. 212, are 
 
 1. Piston Body, 
 
 2. Follower, 
 
 3. Follower Bolts, 
 
 4. Bull Ring, 
 
 5. Packing Rings. 
 
 To prevent loss of pressure by leakage past the piston some form 
 of packing ring is generally employed. Pistons are most always
 
 90 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 made of cast iron as are the rings. The rings are turned to a 
 slightly larger diameter than the cylinder. A piece is then cut 
 out and the ring is then sprung into place. For water pistons 
 
 Fiy. 213 
 
 Fig. 2/4 
 
 Fig. 2/5 
 
 a soft packing of hemp, fiber, or leather is used. For large vertical 
 engines steel pistons are sometimes used. 
 
 Sliding Bearings. Sliding bearings are of many forms, as 
 shown in the following figures. The general end sought is to 
 have the projected area of slide such that the pressure will not 
 force out the lubricant and allow the metals to come into contact 
 with each other. Smoothness of surfaces is only relative and 
 
 F/g. 216 
 
 F/g. 217 
 
 Fig. 2 16 
 
 surfaces in contact wear rapidly, hence the necessity for efficient 
 lubrication. 
 
 Fig. 213 shows a form of planer guide. It is self-adjusting for 
 wear and can be easily oiled. There is, however, considerable 
 pressure between the inclined surfaces, which means that the 
 power for operating the table increases as the angle A is de- 
 creased, and also the wear. A is commonly made 90 or less for 
 small planers, while for heavy planers it may be 110 or more. 
 The side pressure of the tool must be considered in selecting the 
 proper value of A since it exerts a tendency to raise the table 
 from the ways.
 
 MACHINE CONSTRUCTION 
 
 91 
 
 Fig. 214 shows the form generally used for lathe ways. It is 
 self-adjusting, does not readily hold chips or dirt, but is not so 
 easily kept oiled as Fig. 213. 
 
 There are many other forms of such bearing surfaces, some of 
 which are provided with gibs for adjusting, as in Fig. 215. Com- 
 
 Fig. 22 1 
 
 mon forms of crosshead guides for steam engines are shown in 
 Figs. 216, 217, and 218. Fig. 218 is used on all sizes of engines, 
 and is satisfactory, since it allows the crosshead to adjust itself 
 to the crank pin and connecting rod if turned concentric with the 
 
 
 F/g. 223 
 
 cylinder. Sometimes, however, the guides are turned with centers 
 as in Fig. 219. This prevents turning. 
 
 For small pressures the form shown in Fig. 220 is often used, 
 sometimes with one rod only. Fig. 221 is another form of sliding 
 bearing. The pressure per square inch of projected area on cross- 
 head guides should not exceed 100 pounds per square inch and 
 may well be kept as low as 40 pounds per square inch. 
 
 Wear and Pressure. Where there is much wear care must 
 be used in the design of a sliding bearing and guide. Provision 
 should always be made for running over at the ends of the guide. 
 The same applies to the width of the guide. The effect of guides 
 which are too long is shown much exaggerated by the shoulder
 
 92 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 "C" in Fig. 222. Fig. 223 shows the correct design in which the 
 slide runs over the guide at each end and causes more even wear. 
 If "A" and " B" are made of equal length there will be equal 
 wear. This same principle is involved in the piston and cylinder 
 of a steam engine which accounts for the counterbore over which 
 
 Fig. ^26 
 
 Pig. 236 
 
 the piston runs, "C" (Fig. 224), and similarly for slide valve seats 
 (Fig. 225). 
 
 Stuffing Boxes. Some common forms of gland and screw 
 stuffing boxes used on engines, pumps, etc., for preventing leakage 
 of steam or water around the piston rod where it passes through 
 the end of the cylinder are shown in Figs. 226, 227, and 228. For 
 rods P/4 inch in diameter or less the common screw stuffing 
 
 F/ange 
 
 fig.SS9 
 
 f/ff. ^ 
 
 Fig. S3/ 
 
 box, Fig. 228, may be used. They are generally made of com- 
 position although they are sometimes made of cast iron for cheap 
 work. The gland stuffing box (Figs. 226 and 227) is used for 
 rods iVa inch and more in diameter. The box should be deep 
 enough for four strands of packing and the gland so constructed 
 as to be able to compress it to about one half its original size. 
 These glands may have the bottom of the gland and box beveled 
 as shown in Fig. 227. They may be lined with composition in 
 which case the lining should be at least Vie inch thick, but for 
 rods less than 2'/2 inch diameter it is generally advisable to 
 make the gland entirely of composition. These are the com- 
 mon forms, but the student will do well to investigate some of
 
 MACHINE CONSTRUCTION 
 
 93 
 
 the various types of metallic packings, since they are largely 
 used in good designs. 
 
 Useful Curves and Their Application. There are many small 
 details in the actual drafting of a design which often give trouble 
 out of proportion to their apparent importance when first en- 
 
 Fig. S3 2 
 
 /ff. 234- 
 
 countered. The following suggestions are made to facilitate 
 the drafting part of design, and not as rules to be strictly adhered 
 to. Various curves which are commonly used are shown. 
 
 Fillets and Rounds. The drawing of fillets and quarter 
 rounds deserves attention, since they are of so frequent occurrence. 
 Fig. 229 shows a portion of a machine. The centers and radii 
 of the various arcs are indicated. All radii are too large, but 
 
 fig. S39 
 
 especially 1 and 2. Radius 1 gives a point at y. Radius 2 is so 
 large that it cannot be used for the complete circumference of 
 the boss as indicated at x. Of course a changing radius of fillet 
 might be used, but this would not allow the use of ready made 
 fillet strips. Fig. 230, in which the limiting radii are used, is an 
 improvement. Fig. 231 shows a much better design. Note that 
 the radii 1 and 2 are less than the thickness of the flange and 
 boss respectively. The effect of a quarter circle is obtained by 
 this method in which the flange and boss each start with a straight 
 line. The straight line also produces a better appearance after 
 finishing off the surface of the boss. This is shown in Figs. 232, 
 233, and 234, where the effect of different fillets is indicated at B
 
 94 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 in each of the views. In the first case there is an undercutting, 
 in the second view B shows the irregular outline produced, while 
 the third case shows the correct design. 
 
 Arcs and Straight Lines. When arcs are used in connection 
 with straight lines the fault shown at a in Figs. 235 and 237 should 
 be avoided. Do not run the arc past the tangent point "a", 
 and notice that the line a-b is a straight line in Figs. 236 and 238. 
 
 F/'g. s*?o 
 
 At A in Fig. 239 is shown the effect of not changing the radius 
 when two parallel lines are continued by arcs. At B the thick- 
 ness of material has been kept by maintaining the same center 
 and changing the radius by the distance t. 
 
 Flanged Projections. When flanged projections are used 
 with bolts or nuts they may take, a variety of shapes, some of 
 
 Fig. ^44- 
 
 Fig. ^<?5 
 
 Fig. 24- 7 
 
 Fig. 2 4 3 
 
 which are shown in Figs. 240 to 243. After locating the centers 
 of the bolt holes the extent of the flange may be found by adding 
 twice the bolt diameter to the distance between bolt centers. 
 Frequently the outline is obtained as in Fig. 240 in which an arc 
 is drawn from the center of the bolt hole with a radius equal to 
 the diameter of the bolt. 
 
 A much better appearance is obtained by using a larger radius 
 whose center is at the intersection of the bolt hole and the center 
 line, as shown in Fig. 241. Either straight or curved lines may
 
 MACHINE CONSTRUCTION 
 
 95 
 
 be used to join the small and large arcs. Sometimes an ellipse 
 may be used. A gland is used for illustration, but similar cases 
 occur in pipe connections, the bolted feet of machines, etc. 
 
 Flange Edges. Flanges are often finished with curves so as 
 to avoid machining. Several forms are shown in Figs. 244 to 
 248. The radius R may be taken equal to the thickness T. The 
 centers for the various radii are indicated. 
 
 Flanges and Bolting. A method of finding the diameter of 
 bolt circle and diameter of flange is illustrated in Figs. 249, 250, 
 and 251. For through bolts consider Figs. 249 and 250. Draw 
 
 in a proper fillet at r\. For a trial the radius r v may be taken 
 as one fourth of the thickness of the cylinder wall t. Then lay 
 off X, equal to one half the distance across flats of bolt head, 
 and Y, equal to one half the distance across corners of nut. The 
 diameter of the bolt circle, DB, may now be found by laying a 
 scale on the drawing and selecting a dimension. This will be 
 equal to, or greater than, d+ 2( + TI + X), and may be taken 
 at the nearest Vsth inch. The flange diameter may then be 
 obtained by laying out the distance Y, as in Fig. 249, and using 
 the scale to find an even dimension equal to, or greater than, 
 D B + 2( Y + r 2 ). The radius r 2 may be taken at Vsth to Vwth 
 the thickness of the flange. When studs are used the diameters 
 D B and D F may be greatly decreased as shown in Fig. 251. The 
 distance C should be about equal to t, although if necessary it 
 can be made equal to one half the diameter of the bolt. 
 
 Keys. Keys of various forms are used to prevent relative 
 motion between shafts and pulleys, gears, crank arms, etc. The 
 common forms are here shown. Fig. 252 is called a saddle key 
 and may be used where only a small force is to be transmitted
 
 96 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 and where close or frequent adjustment is required. Fig. 253 is 
 called a flat key, and requires a flat spot upon the shaft. Its 
 holding power is a little greater than the preceding form. Set 
 screws are sometimes used with Figs. 252 and 253 to secure a 
 closer contact. Fig. 254 is the most common form, and may be 
 either square or rectangular in section. The sides of the key 
 should fit closely in the hub and shaft. Various proportions 
 are given for keys. Square keys are often made with 
 
 Fig. 253 
 
 /g. 255 
 Other proportions are 
 
 F/'g. 256 
 
 F/g. 257 
 
 Unwin gives 
 
 W 
 T 
 
 The taper for keys may be from Vieth to Visths of an inch per 
 foot of length. One eighth inch is often used. The key should
 
 MACHINE CONSTRUCTION 97 
 
 be half in the shaft and half in the hub. When the force to 
 be transmitted is very large two keys may be used. In such 
 cases they are generally placed 90 apart. The length of keys 
 
 I l ( ) 
 
 Pig. 258 f/g. 259 F/ff. 
 
 should be one and one half or more times the diameter of the 
 shaft. Fig. 256 shows the Lewis key, invented by Wilfred Lewis. 
 The direction of rotation for the driving shaft is indicated. It 
 will be noted that this form is wholly under compression. Fig. 
 255 is a different way of locating a square key. The side S may 
 be taken as one fourth the diameter of the shaft. Fig. 257 shows 
 a round key. It is a desira- 
 ble form when it can be used, 
 as when located at the end 
 of a shaft. Fig. 258 shows 
 the ordinary plain key; Fig. 
 259, a key provided with a gib 
 to make its removal easier. 
 Fig. 260 shows a round end 
 
 key which may be fitted into a shaft. Such keys are often used 
 when it is desired to arrange for a part to slide on the shaft. 
 When a long key is secured in a shaft and used for this purpose it 
 is called a feather or feather key. Square end keys may be used 
 in the same way. Fig. 261 shows the Woodruff Key, which con- 
 sists of a part of a circular disc. They are made rn a variety of 
 sizes with dimensions suiting them to different purposes. The 
 circular seating allows the key to assume the proper taper when 
 a piece is put onto the shaft.
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 SKETCHING 
 
 Uses of Sketching. Freehand sketching is of particular 
 importance hi connection with drafting and will be briefly con- 
 sidered in this chapter. All that has been said in the previous 
 chapters concerning the theory and practice of drafting applies 
 to freehand sketching. The term sketching must not be con- 
 sidered as indicating incompleteness, for if anything a sketch 
 must be more complete than a mechanically executed drawing. 
 Sketching is the engineering language of the trained executive 
 as well as a convenient and quick method of representation. 
 Sketches are used to give information from which parts are to be 
 made; they are used for repair parts; new parts; as an aid to 
 reading drawings; as an aid to design; as a means of recording 
 ideas, and for many other purposes. 
 
 Accuracy of thought, observation, representation, and pro- 
 portion are essential. The four "P's" of sketching are practice, 
 patience, proportion, and proficiency. Too much emphasis can- 
 not be put upon the necessity of accuracy in proportion and 
 detail. 
 
 A most interesting example is shown in Fig. 262 which is a 
 reproduction of a sketch for the first steam hammer as drawn by 
 James Nasmith. Quoting from Nasmith's autobiography by 
 Samuel Smiles: * "I got out my 'scheme book/ on the pages of 
 which I generally thought outj with the aid of pen and pencil, 
 such mechanical adaptations as I had conceived in my mind, and 
 was thereby enabled to render them visible. I then rapidly 
 sketched out my steam hammer, having it all clearly before me 
 in my mind's eye. In a little more than half an hour after re- 
 ceiving Mr. Humphrie's letter, narrating his unlooked-for diffi- 
 culty, I had the whole contrivance in all its executant details, 
 before me in a page of my scheme book. The date of this first 
 drawing was November 24, 1839." 
 
 * Published by Harper and Bros., New York.
 
 SKETCHING 
 
 99 
 
 Materials for Sketching. The materials necessary for sketch- 
 ing are a 2H drawing pencil, pencil eraser, art gum, and paper. 
 Either plain or squared paper may be used, but it is better to use 
 the plain paper at first so as not to be dependent upon the aid 
 
 m 
 
 fi 
 
 &*& '-**.. 3^ ftff || 
 4-^ J^f,,^^ ; ft- 
 
 2fc '^ ^/i^/te^. 
 
 Fia. 262. FIRST DRAWING OF STEAM HAMMER, NOVEMBER 24, 1839. 
 
 which the squares give. The pencil should be kept well sharpened 
 with a long round point. It is desirable to have a small board 
 on which the paper may be tacked, or clip boards such as are 
 used by bookkeepers will be found very convenient as a means 
 of holding the paper. Every sketch should have a title, the date, 
 and the name of the person who made it.
 
 100 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Making a Sketch. To make a sketch the following order 
 may be pursued. First examine the object, determine the num- 
 ber of views necessary completely to define it, and observe the 
 proportions. Then proceed to sketch very lightly, locating 
 center lines and blocking in the limits for all views. Sketch 
 in the details and then go over and brighten up wherever necessary 
 in order to make all parts clear and definite. Straight lines may 
 be drawn by making a succession of short straight lines or by 
 
 Fig. 263 
 
 Fig. 26S 
 
 marking points and drawing from one point to another. Views 
 should be blocked in completely with straight lines regardless of 
 the number of curves and circle arcs. 
 
 To sketch a circle draw center lines at right angles (Fig. 263), 
 space off radii, as shown in Fig. 264, on the center lines and in 
 between them. Another method is to block in a square made up 
 of four smaller squares (Fig. 265), then sketch in one fourth of 
 the required circle at a time. 
 
 Taking Measurements. There are a great many tools used 
 for determining the sizes of machine parts and constructions. 
 The names of some of the tools should be learned together with 
 the methods of using them and the conditions under which they 
 are used. For this purpose the reader is advised to secure a 
 catalog of machinist's tools. Some of the tools used for various 
 purposes are: 
 
 The two foot rule for comparatively rough work. 
 
 The standard steel rule for more accurate work. It should have 
 both binary and decimal divisions. 
 
 Steel tapes used for measuring rather long distances. 
 
 Straight edge, used for extending surfaces. 
 
 The square, used in a variety of forms; fixed, adjustable, com- 
 bination.
 
 SEE 
 
 CHING 
 
 There are many forms;' 
 
 Calipers, used for obtaining distances, 
 outside, inside, spring, transfer. 
 Surface plate and surface gage. 
 Depth gage and hook gage or scale. 
 Plumb bob. 
 Micrometer. 
 Vernier caliper. 
 Plug and ring gages. 
 Wire and sheet metal gages. 
 Screw thread gages. 
 Radius gages. 
 
 The surfaces to be measured are flat surfaces and curved sur- 
 faces. These will appear in many combinations and will require 
 separate consideration in each case. Cylinders may be measured 
 directly with the calipers or scale. A steel tape may be used to 
 measure the circum- 
 ference of a large cyl- 
 inder and the diameter 
 calculated. Angular 
 
 . 266 
 
 measurements are 
 made with some form 
 of protractor. The bevel protractor and center square are useful 
 for this purpose. The use of chalk or a marking solution is often 
 necessary or convenient. Curved outlines may be obtained by 
 offset measurements, by rubbing an outline on paper, or by 
 making a template by such means as the conditions permit. 
 Center distances may be found by measuring from the edge of 
 one hole to the corresponding edge of the next hole as indicated 
 in Fig. 266. 
 
 The question of accuracy in taking measurements will arise 
 frequently. The finished or machined parts should be measured 
 as accurately as the means at hand will allow. Shafts or sliding 
 blocks, or wherever a fit is involved, should be measured with the 
 micrometer or similar accurate means. Rough castings of small 
 or medium size may be measured to the -nearest Vieth inch, while 
 larger ones may be near enough when measured to Vs or even 
 V-ith inch. In all cases judgment must be exercised, and when- 
 ever in doubt take measurements as closely as possible under 
 the conditions.
 
 102 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Where the parts being sketched are for repairs or replacement, 
 very accurate measurements are often required, and in the case 
 of a fit allowance for wear must be made. If a whole new machine 
 or construction is to be built much time can often be saved by 
 less accurate measurements, as the parts will be dimensioned to 
 go together when the final drawing is made. Ingenuity and 
 common sense are the primary requisites. 
 
 In connection with measurements it will be necessary to know 
 something of standard nomenclature. For instance, the three 
 
 -Com 
 
 Groove - F~ile, 
 Chip or Scratch 
 
 Fig. 269 
 
 rig. 267 
 
 dimensions of a taper are indicated by a single number and a 
 name. 
 
 Some Ideas on Sketching. The difficulties which are to be 
 met and overcome when making sketches under trying circum- 
 stances with limited time, inaccessability, with a machine in 
 operation in close quarters, etc. is little understood or appre- 
 ciated by those accustomed to the conveniences of the drafting 
 room. 
 
 Many times sketches are made only for one's own use and 
 so can perhaps be made a little less presentable than when made 
 to take the place of a drawing. However, there is a warning 
 which must be sounded, and that is the unvarying rule "to pre- 
 serve definiteness under all circumstances." A sketch may be 
 hastily made, but a careless sketch is worse than useless. Be 
 sure that what is given is right and of certain meaning. The 
 steps which must be followed in making a sketch are:
 
 SKETCHING 
 
 103 
 
 "Drill 
 
 -3 Lugs 
 Ui tEguo /I y Spaced 
 
 Sketch the parts. 
 
 Put on dimension lines and notes. 
 
 Measure the parts and fill in the figures. 
 
 Some considerations to be kept in mind are: 
 
 Use part views to show special features or details. 
 
 Use notes freely but not as a substitute for necessary views. 
 
 Show hexagons, octagons, etc., across flats using a note to tell 
 the number of sides or insert a revolved section. 
 
 Note identification marks, and mark parts to facilitate putting 
 them together and 
 for fixing relative 
 positions. 
 
 Note finished 
 surfaces and kinds 
 of finish. 
 
 Use templates 
 whenever in doubt 
 as to curves, loca- 
 tion of drilling, etc. 
 
 Note materials 
 of which machine 
 or p rts are made. 
 
 Measure sizes of 
 holes as well as of U 
 
 bolts, shafts, etc. 
 
 A small amount of surface shading is often of value. 
 
 Note the location of the machine in reference to other machines 
 or to building features if such information has any possibility of 
 being useful. 
 
 Rods, bolts, bars, and long pieces of uniform section can gen- 
 erally be shown in one view. 
 
 Most machin ,s and some parts of machines will carry the 
 manufacturer's name and identification, sometimes stamped into 
 the machine, and sometimes on a name plate. The information 
 given in this manner should always be noted in connection with 
 the sketch. Sometimes parts are either right or left hand, and 
 this fact should be noted. It is a good plan to examine all parts 
 very carefully for identification marks. 
 
 When parts bear a definite relation to one another, prick punch 
 marks or a filed groove will often be of great assistance in re- 
 
 12
 
 104 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 assembling (Figs. 267 and 268). Oftentimes the top or bottom 
 of a part should be marked. Where a number of bolts are used 
 with reamed holes they are often numbered or otherwise marked 
 (both bolt holes and bolts, Fig. 269). Very often part views may 
 be used to save time by adding a note: 
 ^ or ms ^ ance > a circular object with lugs, 
 as shown in Fig. 270. In the case of 
 
 \ 
 f" 
 
 _ cylindrical objects the word "diameter" 
 
 will often save a view. A washer 
 
 would be sketched as in Fig. 271. Sections are rather freely 
 used in sketching as they give prominence to the sketch. It is 
 often desirable to make a separate outline sketch without dotted 
 lines in connection with a sectional drawing of a part, especially 
 when the sketches must be hastily made, as the two sketches 
 result in less confusion than when combined in one view. 
 
 When sketches are made in connection with diagrams for the 
 transmission of power, or a 
 mechanism of any sort, the com- 
 
 putations should be included k^x/' /-> L / 
 
 , . ,. - r>- ^ is/, Corbel 
 
 with the sketch, and existing 
 
 pulleys or other parts should be 
 
 clearly dimensioned and indi- 
 
 cated to distinguish them from 
 
 proposed additions. In the case usefu/ to /ocate\ 
 
 of foundations where bolts are e/bo*/ p.. 
 
 to be located, differences in level 
 
 must be considered as well as center line distances. When locat- 
 
 ing shaft hangers, or constructions to be fastened to a wall or 
 
 ceiling, the surroundings such as parts of the permanent struc- 
 
 ture, like beams or corbeling of the brick wall (Fig. 272), 
 
 should be measured and sketched with the part to be installed. 
 
 The principal point to be brought out in connection with sketch- 
 ing of any kind is to leave nothing to guess to have too much 
 rather than too little information, and to make every line and note 
 absolutely definite.
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 
 ESTIMATION OF WEIGHTS 
 
 Accuracy. It is often necessary to compute the weight of 
 machine parts or of piles of materials; for instance, to estimate 
 the amount of coal on hand. The annual stock taking of many 
 companies requires much of this work which must be accom- 
 plished accurately and expeditiously. Some of the methods used 
 should be known together with the degree of accuracy required. 
 For some purposes a result within 5 % or even 10 % may be suf- 
 ficiently close, while in other cases an accurate result may be 
 desirable, as when figuring a large number of pieces of expensive 
 material . The weights of many standard parts are well known 
 and are given in manufacturers' catalogs. The weights of steel 
 shapes are known and tabulated in pounds per linear foot, the 
 weight of bolts per 100, and similarly for other pieces. 
 
 Weights of Materials. The following weights are average 
 values for various materials and may be used for ordinary cal- 
 culations. 
 
 Material 
 
 Pounds per 
 Cubic Inch 
 
 Pounds per 
 Cubic Foot 
 
 Cast Iron 
 
 .26 
 
 450 
 
 Wrought iron 
 
 .28 
 
 480 
 
 Steel 
 
 .29 
 
 490 
 
 Brass 
 
 .30 
 
 530 
 
 Copper 
 
 .32 
 
 550 
 
 Lead 
 
 .41 
 
 710 
 
 Aluminum 
 
 
 160 
 
 Granite 
 
 
 170 
 
 Brick 
 
 
 120 
 
 Concrete 
 
 
 145 
 
 Water 
 
 .036 
 
 62.5 
 
 Spruce 
 
 
 30 
 
 White pine 
 
 
 30 
 
 Yellow pine 
 
 
 41 
 
 Maple 
 
 
 45 
 
 Lignum vitae 
 
 
 83 
 
 Oak 
 
 
 50 
 
 105
 
 106 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Weight of Loose Materials. In estimating the amount of 
 material in a pile, its shape may be approximated to one or more 
 geometrical forms and its volume computed. This is best done 
 by making a sketch with dimension lines which are filled in with 
 measurements. Such sketches should be preserved for checking 
 purposes and as a record. The weight per cubic foot or yard is 
 then obtained by loading a car of measured volume and weighing 
 it or by filling a box containing a cubic foot or yard and finding 
 the net weight. The material should of course be disposed as 
 
 Fig. 
 
 near the density of the pile as possible. By careful judgment 
 and some experience a very close approximation of weight may be 
 obtained in this manner. For more accurate work, the surveyor's 
 transit may be used. 
 
 Weight of Castings. The computation of the weight of cast- 
 ings most frequently occurs either in connection with the cost or 
 where a machine must come within certain limits of weight. 
 The weight may be calculated from the drawings. For simple 
 objects this is not difficult, but for many shapes much loss of 
 time may be saved by systematic methods and proper division 
 into elementary forms. Two sets of weights must be considered; 
 one the object in the rough, and the other the finished piece. 
 Allowances for finish must be made. It is necessary to know 
 what holes or openings are to be cored and what ones are to be 
 machined. Cylindrical pieces are readily figured by dividing
 
 ESTIMATION OF WEIGHTS 
 
 107 
 
 into separate cylinders. Limits as to weight are very important 
 when machines must be assembled in out of the way places, or 
 where transportation is by pack mules or other primitive means. 
 
 Methods of Calculation. The general method of finding the 
 weight of a piece is to compute its total volume in cubic inches 
 and then multiply this volume by the weight of a cubic inch of 
 the material. Most pieces may be divided into flat plates, cylin- 
 ders, and flanges, each of which should be lettered and tabulated. 
 Sometimes fillets may be balanced against bolt holes or against 
 rounded corners. In other cases the fillets may be considered 
 as a certain per cent of the whole. The weight as figured should 
 also be increased to allow for rapping the pattern in the mold. 
 The allowance for finish may be l / 8 " for general work but this 
 varies with different classes of work and with the degree of 
 accuracy required in the finished piece. 
 
 When a piece has a uniform thickness but irregular outline it 
 may be broken up into plane figures and the area of each found 
 separately (Fig. 273). After adding them together multiply by 
 the thickness to obtain the volume and then by the unit weight 
 to find the total weight, as illustrated. The dash lines divide the 
 flat surface into seven parts, each of which is lettered. These 
 may be listed in tabular form. 
 
 Designation 
 
 Part 
 
 Dimensions 
 Inches 
 
 Area 
 Square Inches 
 
 A 
 
 Rectangle 
 
 4x 3 /4 
 
 3. 
 
 B 
 
 11 
 
 ! 3 /4 X 1 
 
 1.75 
 
 C 
 
 " 
 
 5 1 / 2 x l'/4 
 
 6.875 
 
 D 
 
 " 
 
 4 1 / 2 X 1 
 
 4.5 
 
 E 
 
 Triangle 
 
 V(2V* x 41/2) 
 
 5.625 
 
 F 
 
 
 1 / 4 (36 - 28.27) 
 
 1.93 
 
 G 
 
 Circle 
 
 l /4(3.1418) 
 
 .785 
 
 Total area square inches . . . 
 Volume = area x thickness 
 
 = 24.47 x 1.25 = 30.59 cubic inches 
 
 24.465 
 
 The area of part G is one fourth the area of a circle having the 
 radius indicated. The area of part F is found by subtracting one
 
 108 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 fourth the area of a circle having the radius given from the area 
 of a square, one side of which is equal to the radius of the arc. 
 With irregular shapes the area is sometimes divided approxi- 
 mately into regu- 
 ^ r- lar figures, the 
 I I dimensions for 
 ; which are ob- 
 I tained by apply- 
 
 the drawing. This is illustrated in Fig. 274 where the dash line 
 x-x is drawn so that the area B appears to be equal to the area 
 A + A. The distance H is then measured and multiplied by L to 
 find the area. In the case of hollow pieces, find the volume as 
 though the piece was solid, then subtract the volume of the spaces. 
 
 Fig.2Y5 
 
 In Fig. 275 the volume would be found as tabulated, in which 
 the A and B are called plus (+) volumes and C is called a minus 
 ( ) volume. 
 
 
 
 
 Volume in Cubic Inches 
 
 Designation 
 
 Part 
 
 Dimension 
 
 
 
 
 
 + 
 
 - 
 
 A 
 
 Square prism 
 
 3 X 3 X 2*/2 
 
 22.5 
 
 
 B 
 
 Rectangular plate 
 
 5x6x1 
 
 30. 
 
 
 C 
 
 Cylinder 
 
 1 x 3.1416 x 3 
 
 
 9.42 
 
 Totals. 
 
 52.. r 
 
 9.42 
 
 (A + B) - C = Net volume 
 52.5 - 9.42 = 43 + cubic inches
 
 ESTIMATION OF WEIGHTS 
 
 109 
 
 For the ring shown in Fig. 276 find the area of the cross section A 
 and multiply by the circumference of the mean diameter. This 
 method is often a convenient one. 
 
 Weight of Cylinder Head. To find the approximate weight 
 of the small cylinder head of Fig. 277 it may be divided into 
 
 Mean Diameter 
 
 rig. S76 
 
 three cylinders, two positive and one negative. The round at 
 x may be balanced against the fillet at y for approximation pur- 
 poses. Allow say Vieth inch on each of the finished surfaces. 
 The calculations will be as tabulated. 
 
 Designation 
 
 Part 
 
 Dimensions Inches 
 
 Volume Cubic Inches 
 
 + 
 
 - 
 
 A 
 B 
 
 C 
 
 Cylinder 
 
 28.27 x Vie 
 9.62 x 3 /s 
 4.91 x 3 /s 
 
 15.90 
 3.61 
 
 1.84 
 
 Total 
 
 19.51 
 
 1.84 
 
 (A + B) - C = net volume 
 
 19.51 - 1.84 = 17.67 cu. in. 
 
 Vol. x wt. per cu. in. = total weight 
 
 17.67 x .26 = 4.60 pounds
 
 110 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Weight of Plunger Barrel. To approximate the weight of 
 the pump barrel shown in Fig. 278. First divide it into parts as 
 indicated in the figure. The plus volume treats it as a solid. 
 The minus volume consists of the interior cylindrical spaces
 
 ESTIMATION OF WEIGHTS 
 
 111 
 
 H, G, F, and J. The calculations for its cost at ten cents per 
 pound follow. For any other price multiply by the required 
 cents per pound and divide by ten. Since both ends are alike 
 only one half is figured and the result is then multiplied by two. 
 
 Designation 
 
 Part 
 
 Dimensions Inches 
 
 Volume Cubic Inches 
 
 + 
 
 - 
 
 A 
 B 
 
 C 
 
 D 
 E 
 
 F 
 G 
 H 
 J 
 
 Flange 
 Stuff box 
 
 Main cylinder 
 
 Port flange 
 Foot flange 
 
 Cylinder 
 Throat 
 Stuff box 
 Port 
 
 12 x 12 x I 1 / 4 
 T(7-5) 2 
 
 180 
 154 
 
 481 
 
 62 
 80 
 
 274 
 9 
 116 
 11 
 
 EW X1 4/ 
 
 7 x7 x l/4 
 4x8 xl'/4 
 
 ^X14 
 
 =SK.xV. 
 
 ^ X4 
 
 '<3) ! r , 
 
 
 Total volumes 
 
 957 
 
 410 
 
 Multiplied by 2 for two ends 
 
 1914 
 
 820 
 
 1094 cu. in. net volume 
 1094 x .26 = 285, pounds weight 
 285 x .10 = $28.50, cost of casting at 10 cents per pound 
 
 Weight of Forgings. Steel and wrought iron shafts may 
 be readily figured, especially when turned from stock bars or 
 rods. Forgings, however, require careful consideration as the 
 rough forging may weigh from 25 % to 50 % more than the "finished 
 piece, especially if the shape is at all complicated.
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 PIPING 
 
 Piping Materials. Pipe made of various materials is used 
 for conveying liquids and gases. For a complete treatment of 
 the subject of piping and its uses, piping drawings, etc., see the 
 author's "Handbook on Piping," D. Van Nostrand Company, 
 N. Y. The illustrations for this chapter are from the above book. 
 
 ' # Left Coi/p/ing 
 
 Fig. 279 
 
 Cast iron pipe is cheaply made and is used for underground 
 gas, water, and drain pipes, sometimes for steam and exhaust 
 pipes where low pressures are carried. 
 
 Wrought iron or steel pipe is most commonly used, especially 
 where high pressures are encountered. Copper is used to a certain 
 extent where there is limited room. For hot water or bad water, 
 brass pipe is to be preferred as it does not corrode like iron or 
 steel. Spiral riveted steel piping is often used for large pipes. 
 
 Pipe Fittings. For joining lengths of pipe and making turns 
 and connections, "fittings" are used, Fig. 279. Such fittings 
 consist of flanges, couplings, tees, ells, crosses, etc. Small pipe 
 is often "made up" by means of couplings and screwed fit- 
 tings large sizes use flanges and flanged fittings. Some general 
 information is given in the tables included in this chapter. 
 
 112
 
 r 
 
 OH *. 
 
 p 
 
 X- 
 
 ~~^~~ 
 ~~\^T 
 
 PIPING 
 
 / -/re - P/f 
 G/ot>e V0/re 
 
 Gaf-s I4r/re 
 Gate Mr/re 
 
 Ya/re 
 F~ig.2dO 
 
 113 
 
 Throttle 
 
 p 
 
 Tee 
 
 Check Mr/re 
 
 'G/obe Va/re 
 
 3 'Check fo/re 
 
 Fig 262
 
 114 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 The representations of Figs. 280 and 281 are often used when 
 making piping layouts. 
 
 Standard Pipe. Wrought pipe is known by its nominal inside 
 diameter. In the United States the Briggs Standard is in general 
 use. The nominal diameter differs from the actual diameter by 
 varying amounts, as indicated in the Table. Standard pipe is 
 
 _JL 
 
 I .075' 
 
 Fig. 263 
 
 used for pressures up to 125 pounds per square inch. Extra 
 strong and double extra strong pipe are made for use at higher 
 pressures. The extra thickness is obtained by reducing the in- 
 side diameter, the outside diameter remaining constant for a 
 given nominal diameter. The actual cross sections for the 
 three weights of 3 / 4 inch pipe are shown in Fig. 282. 
 
 Pipe Threads. Pipe threads are cut with an angle of 60, 
 with the top and bottom rounded, making the height .8 of the 
 pitch. The threads are also cut on a taper of three fourths inch 
 per foot as illustrated in Fig. 283. 
 
 DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD WROUGHT PIPE 
 
 Nominal 
 Diameter, 
 Inches 
 
 Actual Inside 
 Diameter, 
 Inches 
 
 Actual 
 Outside 
 Diameter, 
 Inches 
 
 Threads 
 per Inch 
 
 Length of 
 Perfect Thread, 
 Inches 
 
 Vs 
 
 .269 
 
 .405 
 
 27 
 
 .19 
 
 v 
 
 .364 
 
 .540 
 
 18 
 
 .29 
 
 3 /8 
 
 .493 
 
 .675 
 
 18 
 
 .30 
 
 v 
 
 .622 
 
 .840 
 
 14 
 
 .39 
 
 3 /4 
 
 .824 
 
 1.050 
 
 14 
 
 .40 
 
 1 
 
 1.049 
 
 1.315 
 
 iiVi 
 
 .51 
 
 l'/4 
 
 1.380 
 
 1.660 
 
 il/i 
 
 .54 
 
 !*/ 
 
 1.610 
 
 1.900 
 
 HVt 
 
 .55 
 
 2 
 
 2.067 
 
 2.375 
 
 iiVi 
 
 .58 
 
 2 1 / 2 
 
 2.469 
 
 2.875 
 
 8 
 
 .89 
 
 3 
 
 3.068 
 
 3.500 
 
 8 
 
 .95 
 
 3/i 
 
 3.548 
 
 4.000 
 
 8 
 
 1.00 
 
 4 
 
 4.026 
 
 4.500 
 
 8 
 
 1.05
 
 PIPING 
 
 115 
 
 DIMENSIONS OF WALWORTH MFG. Co. CAST IRON FITTINGS 
 
 Size of 
 Pipe, 
 
 Inches 
 
 A 
 
 Inches 
 
 A-A 
 Inches 
 
 B 
 
 Inches 
 
 C 
 
 Inches 
 
 D 
 
 Inches 
 
 E 
 
 Inches 
 
 F 
 Inches 
 
 G 
 Inches 
 
 'A 
 
 3 /4 
 
 iVi 
 
 Vl6 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Vi 
 
 Vs 
 
 V 
 
 7 /8 
 
 W 4 
 
 Vl6 
 
 IVie 
 
 i/u 
 
 iVt 
 
 /If 
 
 Vl6 
 
 Vi 
 
 !Vl6 
 
 2'/8 
 
 "/16 
 
 ! 7 /8 
 
 2Vi 
 
 !Vl6 
 
 3 /8 
 
 Vi 
 
 3 /4 
 
 l/M 
 
 2 5 /8 
 
 13 /16 
 
 2Vl6 
 
 2 3 /4 
 
 1V4 
 
 Vl6 
 
 Via 
 
 1 
 
 IVi 
 
 3 
 
 15 /16 
 
 2V2 
 
 3V4 
 
 2 1 / 16 
 
 Vi 
 
 5 /8 
 
 1V4 
 
 I 13 / 16 
 
 3 5 /8 
 
 !Vl6 
 
 3 
 
 3V 4 
 
 2'/2 
 
 Vl6 
 
 /! 
 
 IVi 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 P/16 
 
 3 1 / 4 
 
 4 3 / 4 
 
 2 3 /4 
 
 6 /8 
 
 13 /16 
 
 2 
 
 2/s 
 
 4V4 
 
 ! 3 /8 
 
 4 
 
 5*/i 
 
 3 3 /8 
 
 U /16 
 
 V 
 
 2 1 / 2 
 
 2 7 /8 
 
 W4 
 
 ! 5 /8 
 
 5 
 
 6 13 /16 
 
 4Vs 
 
 13 /16 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 3 5 / 16 
 
 6 5 /8 
 
 1V 
 
 6V, 
 
 7Vs 
 
 4V 4 
 
 15 /16 
 
 1 
 
 3'/2 
 
 3/u 
 
 7 3 /8 
 
 2Vl6 
 
 6 3 /8 
 
 8V 4 
 
 5 1 / 4 
 
 1 
 
 !Vl6 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 8 
 
 2 1 / 4 
 
 7^/8 
 
 9 3 / 4 
 
 6 
 
 !Vl6 
 
 1V
 
 116 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 AMERICAN STANDARD PIPE FLANGES 
 125 Pounds Working Pressure 
 
 Pipe Size, 
 Inches 
 
 Diameter 
 of Flange, 
 Inches 
 
 Thickness 
 of Flange, 
 Inches 
 
 Diameter of 
 Bolt Circle, 
 Inches 
 
 Number 
 of 
 Bolts 
 
 Diameter 
 of Bolts, 
 Inches 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 Vl6 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 Vl6 
 
 iy 
 
 #/, 
 
 / 
 
 3Vs 
 
 4 
 
 Vl6 
 
 iVi 
 
 5 
 
 Vl6 
 
 3Vs 
 
 4 
 
 /l 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 / 
 
 4 3 / 4 
 
 4 
 
 6 /8 
 
 2Vi 
 
 7 
 
 "/16 
 
 5V2 
 
 4 
 
 '/ 
 
 3 
 
 7>A 
 
 3 /4 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 6 /8 
 
 8/i 
 
 8A 
 
 13 /16 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 8 /8 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 15 /16 
 
 7V 2 
 
 8 
 
 8 /8 
 
 4>/i 
 
 9 1 / 4 
 
 15 /16 
 
 7 3 /4 
 
 8 
 
 3 /4 
 
 5 
 
 10 
 
 15 /16 
 
 8 1 / 2 
 
 8 
 
 3 /4 
 
 6 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 9 1 / 2 
 
 8 
 
 3 /4 
 
 7 
 
 I2/i 
 
 !Vl6 
 
 103/4 
 
 8 
 
 3 /4 
 
 8 
 
 /i 
 
 !*/ 
 
 1P/4 
 
 8 
 
 3 /4
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 INTERSECTIONS 
 
 The Line of Intersection. The line of intersection of two 
 surfaces is that line which contains all the points which are on 
 both of the surfaces. Objects in general are made up of parts 
 and where these parts come together there is said to be a line of 
 intersection, as shown in Figs. 
 285 and 286. The chimney 
 intersects the roof and there is 
 also an intersection between 
 the dormer window and the 
 roof. The intersection be- 
 tween two cylinders is shown 
 in Fig. 286. 
 
 It is often necessary to determine the intersection of two sur- 
 faces, either to find the appearance or for purposes of develop- 
 ment. 
 
 The intersection between two planes is a straight line as shown 
 in Fig. 287. If these planes cut a cylinder or cone the lines of 
 
 intersection may be straight or 
 curved (Figs. 288 and 289). If 
 the plane is at right angles to 
 the axis a right section is cut as 
 shown by the horizontal planes 
 which intersect the cylinder and 
 cone in circles. If the plane 
 passes through the axis it inter- 
 
 of /nf&rsecf/on 
 
 F/g. 2 06 
 
 sects the cylinder in a straight line parallel to the axis called an 
 element. In like manner an element may be cut from the cone. 
 Note that all the elements of a cylinder are parallel, and that all 
 the elements of a cone pass through the apex. 
 
 Intersecting planes, elements, and cut sections are the basis 
 for finding lines of intersection of surfaces. 
 
 117
 
 118 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Intersection of a Vertical Prism and a Horizontal Prism. 
 Fig. 290 shows a square prism intersecting a triangular prism. 
 Two methods of solution may be used. First method: Examine 
 the three views, then note that the top view shows where the 
 
 r/g 87 
 
 Fig. 286 
 
 Fig. 289 
 
 edge AB of the square prism pierces the front face of the tri- 
 angular prism at point B H . The front and side views of this 
 point may be obtained by projection and are shown at B v and B*. 
 Note that the front view shows the intersection of the edge EF 
 
 of the square prism 
 with a vertical edge of 
 the triangular prism. 
 Project to the other 
 views. Join the points 
 thus found which will 
 determine the projec- 
 tions of a line of in- 
 tersection between the 
 two prisms. Second 
 method: Imagine a 
 vertical plane to be 
 through the 
 
 edge AB. This plane 
 f/ff. 290 w in intersect the face 
 
 of the triangular prism in a vertical line xy shown in the front 
 view. Since the lines xy and AB are in the same plane, the 
 point in which they cross will show in the front view at B v . By 
 passing similar planes through each of the edges the other points 
 may be found. 
 
 Intersection of a Vertical Prism and an Inclined Prism 
 Visibility of Points. The intersection of two prisms, one of
 
 INTERSECTIONS 
 
 119 
 
 which is inclined, is shown in Fig. 291. Either of the methods 
 just described may be used, but the second method is to be pre- 
 ferred. A cutting plane must be 
 passed through each edge of both 
 prisms within the limits of the curve 
 of intersection. This means all of 
 the edges of either prism through 
 which a plane may be passed that 
 will cut the other prism. A plane 
 passed through the front edge of 
 the vertical prism would not cut 
 the inclined prism, and so would 
 not locate any points on the line 
 of intersection. A vertical plane 
 through line AB will intersect the 
 front face of the rectangular prism 
 in line C V D V . The point in which /?" ^ 
 
 these lines cross is shown in the 
 
 front view at B v . Since both lines are on visible faces of the 
 prisms the two lines are visible and the point B v is visible. Lines 
 
 Fjff. 
 
 of intersection in order to be visible must join two visible points 
 determined as stated. A vertical plane through the edge EF 
 will intersect the inclined prism in two lines parallel to the inclined
 
 120 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 edges as shown. Each of these inclined lines intersects the edge 
 EF so that the two points G and H are located. The edge EF 
 would be visible if the inclined prism was not in front of it. The 
 two inclined lines, however, are on the back or invisible faces of 
 the inclined prism and so are invisible. The points G and H are 
 therefore invisible. A line joining 
 two invisible points or one visible 
 and one invisible point is invisible. 
 Lines which are visible in one view 
 may or may not be invisible in 
 another, and should be considered 
 separately. 
 
 Intersecting Cylinders. Two in- 
 tersecting cylinders are shown in Fig. 
 292. Divide the small cylinder into 
 equal parts and then pass planes 
 which will cut elements from both 
 cylinders. The planes w, x, y, and z 
 cut elements 1, 2, 3, and 4 from the 
 cylinders. The points in which ele- 
 
 Flg. 293 
 
 ments in the same plane cross are shown in the front view at 
 points 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., thus determining the curve of intersection. 
 Use as many planes as are necessary to obtain a smooth curve. 
 
 
 Be sure to pass planes through the contour or outside elements 
 of both cylinders in order to obtain the extreme limits of the 
 curve. This is very important, especially when the axes of the 
 cylinders do not intersect. 
 
 Choice of Cutting Planes. Whenever possible planes should 
 be passed so as to cut straight lines from both surfaces. The 
 lines (not parallel) on the same plane intersect in points which 
 are common to both surfaces and are therefore points in the 
 curve of intersection. The intersection between surfaces can 
 very often be found by horizontal cutting planes, as indicated
 
 INTERSECTIONS 
 
 121 
 
 in Fig. 293, which would be employed for the cases presented in 
 Fig. 294 and similar conditions. Considering Fig. 293 it will be 
 observed that horizontal cutting planes are used. Each plane 
 cuts a straight line from the prism and a circle from the cone, 
 
 Fig. 295 
 
 as shown in the top view. Where the line and the circle cross is 
 a point common to the prism and the cone. Other points found 
 in the same way will complete the curve of intersection. 
 
 Connecting Rod Intersection. Fig. 295 shows a portion of a 
 connecting rod of circular cross section with a rectangular end.
 
 122 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 The circular section is increased where it joins the rectangular 
 portion. The curves of intersection are found as described. 
 Notice that the centers for the radii RiRi are in the same per- 
 pendicular line. DI is the diameter of the rod. There are certain 
 "critical points" and these will be mentioned first. Where RI 
 cuts the width of the rectangular part in the top view gives point 
 a h and this point will fall on the center line in the side view and 
 so is projected to a v . In a similar manner point 6 V may be pro- 
 jected to the top view at point 6 h . The end view is needed to 
 obtain the other points. With as a center and the corner 
 distance OC as a radius, draw the arc CCi. Continue the radius 
 RI in the side view. A horizontal line through d will intersect 
 radius RI at 2 from which C v and C h may be projected. The 
 radius OC gives the largest circle which will touch the rectangular 
 section and so determines one end of the curve, as shown. A 
 plane passed through C^ or to left of point C v and perpendicular 
 to the axis will give a rectangular section. A plane to the right 
 of point C* will give other sections which will be described. 
 
 To determine the curve in top view. Two points b and c are 
 already determined. For any other point d in end view, draw 
 an arc ddi, with od as a radius. From d\ project horizontally to 
 dz and then as shown to d h in the top view. 
 
 To determine the curve in the side view. Two points a and c 
 are already determined. Take any point e in the end view and 
 with a radius oe draw arc ee\', project horizontally from e\ to e^. 
 The intersection of a vertical line through e z with a horizontal 
 line through e will give point e v , a point on the desired curve. 
 Point / and other points are found in the same manner. It will 
 be observed that a plane through e and perpendicular to the axis 
 would give the section indicated by section lines in the end view.
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 DEVELOPMENTS 
 
 Surfaces. Surfaces may be divided into two classes, plane 
 surfaces and curved surfaces. Plane surfaces show in their true 
 size and shape when they are parallel to one of the planes of 
 projection, so that an object bounded by plane surfaces can 
 have each of its faces brought into contact with a piece of paper, 
 either by wrapping the paper about the object or placing the 
 
 F/g. 296 
 
 object on the paper and then turning it until each face has touched 
 the paper. This is shown in Fig. 296 where the paper has been 
 cut so it will exactly cover the object when it is folded about it. 
 Such an outline is called a development. A curved surface does 
 not show in its true size no matter how it is placed with regard 
 to the planes of projection. Some kinds of curved surfaces 
 can be developed by rolling them on a plane as illustrated in 
 Fig. 297. The distance L is equal to the distance around the 
 cylinder and the height H of course remains equal to the length 
 of the cylinder. Other surfaces, such as the surface of a sphere, 
 cannot be exactly developed, but there are approximate methods 
 which are generally accurate enough. 
 
 123
 
 124 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Development of a Prism. The prism of Fig. 296 is developed 
 by laying out in a straight line and in the proper order the distances 
 1-4, 4~$} 3-2, and 2-1, which added together are equal to the 
 
 Fig. 29 7 
 
 distance around the prism. At each of the points a line is drawn 
 equal to the long edge of the prism and the ends joined together. 
 Then the two ends of the prism are measured out as shown. 
 The development of the lateral surface of a hexagonal prism 
 
 is shown in Fig. 298. First lay off in a straight line and in proper 
 order the edges 1-2, 2-3, etc., all the way around the prism as 
 shown at the right. At points 1,2,3, etc., draw the perpendiculars 
 equal in length to the edges of the prism, thus obtaining the true 
 size and shape of each face of the prism and in such order that
 
 DEVELOPMENTS 
 
 125 
 
 they might be folded to the form of the prism. Note that a 
 square prism intersects the hexagonal prism which has been cut 
 along the curve of intersection. To find the cut-out on the de- 
 
 velopment draw the vertical lines A, B, and C on the faces of the 
 hexagonal prism and locate them on the development by measur- 
 ing their distances from the edges 2 and 3. The points of inter- 
 
 Fig. 3OO 
 
 section may then be located by drawing horizontal lines as shown 
 or by measuring up or down the lines on the front view of the 
 hexagonal prism and measuring the same distances on the same 
 lines of the development. The development of the top and
 
 126 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 bottom of the prism may be obtained from the top view and 
 added to the lateral surface. 
 
 Development of a Cylinder. The development of a cylinder 
 was illustrated in Fig. 297. One half of a square elbow is de- 
 veloped in Fig. 299. First divide the top view into a number of 
 equal parts. Through each point draw an elemen of the cylinder. 
 By taking the elements close enough together the arcs may be 
 considered as straight lines. The problem is then the same as 
 
 developing a prism 
 with a large num- 
 ber of sides. Lay 
 off the distances 
 between the ele- 
 ments along a 
 straight line. At 
 each point draw the 
 element in its true 
 length. Through 
 the ends of the elements draw a smooth curve, very lightly free- 
 hand, and then brighten it up using the irregular curve. The 
 lengths of the elements may be conveniently found by drawing 
 horizontal lines from the front view as illustrated. The develop- 
 ment of the bases may be found by an auxiliary view and from 
 the top view. 
 
 Development of a Pyramid. The development of a pyramid 
 with a part cut away is shown in Fig. 300. Assume the pyramid 
 to be complete. There are six equal faces, each one a triangle. 
 The development consists in laying out all the faces in their true 
 size and proper order. The short edges are shown in their true 
 length in the top view as 1-2, 2-3, etc. The long edges are all of 
 the same length and are equal to the distance O v -l v shown in 
 the front view. Observe that H -1 H is horizontal in the top view. 
 The faces may be constructed in their true size by drawing an 
 arc, with Oi as a center and O v l v as a radius. Starting at 1\, 
 space off the chords li-2i, 81-81, etc., equal to 1*-2 H , 2 H -3 H , etc. 
 Draw lines 0\ 1\, 0\ 2\, etc., representing edges of the pyramid. 
 Construct the development of the base so that it may be folded 
 into the proper position. Note carefully that the numbers on 
 the base will match the numbers on the edges when the develop- 
 ment is folded to form the pyramid. To show the part which
 
 DEVELOPMENTS 
 
 127 
 
 has been cut away measure the distance 0\C\ on the edge 0\4\ 
 equal to the distance V C V . Measure distances 5\Bi and 3\Ai on 
 the development of the faces and of the base equal to the distances 
 5 H B H and 3 H A H obtained from the top view. Join points AiCi
 
 128 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 and BI on the development of the faces. On the development 
 of the base construct the triangle A\B\C\ obtaining distances 
 BiCi and Aid from the development of the faces. The com- 
 pleted development is shown by the heavy lines. 
 
 The Development of a Cone. The development of a cone 
 is shown in Fig. 301. Divide the base into a number of parts 
 and draw elements of the cone. By taking the small arcs as 
 straight lines the solution is the same as for a pyramid. The 
 surface is thus considered to be divided into a number of equal 
 triangles. This method is sufficiently accurate for most pur- 
 poses. With the radius R draw an arc of a circle. On the arc 
 space off the circumference of the base of the cone. The base 
 need not be developed as it shows in its true size in the top view. 
 
 Development of a Transition Piece. A transition piece is 
 shown in Fig. 302 connecting a circular pipe with a rectangular 
 one. The development of such a piece should present no diffi- 
 culties if the previous figures have been, carefully studied. Com- 
 paring the two views as given in Fig. 303 with the picture of 
 Fig. 302, it will be seen that the transition piece may be "broken 
 up" into triangles and parts of cones. The triangles are AB1, 
 BC5, CD9, and DAW, The parts of cones are the curved surfaces 
 between the triangles. Consider the apex of one cone as located 
 at B. Divide the portion of the base 1-5 into a number of parts 
 and draw the elements B-l, B-2, B-3, B~4, and B-5. The 
 triangles thus formed will approximate the surface of the cone. 
 The lines A B, BC, etc. show in their true length in the top view. 
 The true length of the elements may be found as follows: Con- 
 sider a line to be dropped from point B perpendicular to the base 
 of the cone. A line may then be drawn on the base of the cone 
 from point 1 to the perpendicular line, thus forming a right triangle 
 with the element B-l as the hypotenuse. By constructing this 
 right triangle in its true size the true length of B-l may be found. 
 This has been done in Diagram I. The length of the perpendicular 
 line is shown at BX and is found by drawing the horizontal lines 
 shown. The base of the triangle is equal to the length of the 
 horizontal projection of B-l. Point 1 in Diagram I is found 
 by making x-1 equal to B-l . In the same way find the lengths 
 of the other elements by laying off 
 
 x-2 equal to B-2 
 x-3 equal to B-3
 
 DEVELOPMENTS 129 
 
 etc., obtained from the top view. Then draw B-2, B-3, etc. 
 the true lengths of the elements which are used in the construc- 
 tion described below. In the same manner construct Diagram II 
 for the other cone. Having found all the true lengths proceed 
 as follows: Construct the triangle AB1, in its true size. With 
 B as a center and B2 as a radius, draw an arc. With 1 as a 
 center and a radius equal to 1-2 obtained from the top view de- 
 scribe another arc cutting the first arc. This will locate point 2. 
 With B as a center and B-3 as a radius describe an arc. With 
 2 as a center and a radius equal to 2-3 obtained from the top 
 view describe another arc, thus locating point 3. Proceed until 
 the four triangles forming the conical surface are properly located, 
 then draw a smooth curve through the points 1,2, 3, etc. Con- 
 struct triangle CB5, using the element^ as a starting side. Then 
 develop the conical surface having C as an apex and 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 
 as part of the base. Construct the triangle CD9 in its true size. 
 Since the piece is symmetrical the remaining parts are the same 
 as those already developed. 
 
 All kinds of surfaces can be developed approximately by divid- 
 ing them into triangles, then finding the true size of each triangle 
 and arranging them in the proper relation to each other.
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 PICTURE DRAWING 
 
 Isometric Drawing. By means of an isometric projection 
 three faces of an object can be shown in a single view. This is 
 possible by considering the object to be placed in the position of 
 a cube standing on one corner and having another corner exactly 
 
 F/ff. 3O4 r/'g. 305 
 
 in the center of the view. In Fig. 304 the cube is resting upon 
 point A in such a position that point B is located in the center of 
 
 fig. 30 6 
 
 Fig. SO 7 
 
 the view obtained by projecting onto a vertical plane. The 
 orthographic projection of this front view is shown in Fig. 305, 
 which is called the isometric projection of a cube. In this view 
 
 130
 
 PICTURE DRAWING 
 
 131 
 
 the line AB is vertical and the lines BC and BD make angles of 
 30 with the horizontal. All the edges of the cube show equal 
 to each other in length. This length however is shorter than 
 
 . 308 
 
 . 309 
 
 on the actual cube. For drawing purposes the lines BD, BC, 
 and BA, etc. are made the same length as on the actual cube. 
 The angles formed by the three lines which meet at point B are 
 equal to 120 each. The three lines are called the isometric axes 
 and form the basis for isometric drawing. 
 
 Fig. 3/0. \A 
 
 rig. 31 1 
 
 Isometric and Non-isometric Lines. All measurements for 
 isometric drawings are taken along or parallel to the isometric 
 axes. Lines parallel to the isometric axes are called isometric 
 lines. All other lines are non-isometric lines and cannot be 
 measured directly. 
 
 To make an Isometric Drawing of the Object shown in Fig. 
 306. Draw the isometric axes, BC, BA, and BD (Fig. 307).
 
 132 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 From B measure I 1 // 7 toward D, 1" toward C, and 7 / 8 " toward A. 
 From the points thus located draw lines parallel to the isometric 
 axes and lay off distances corresponding to the figures given in 
 
 Fig. 3/2 
 
 Fig. 306. Note that lines which are parallel in Fig. 306 are 
 parallel in Fig. 307. 
 
 To make an Isometric Drawing of the Object shown in Fig. 
 308. Draw the isometric axes (Fig. 309) as in the preceding 
 case. Locate the point F by measuring along BC. Locate 
 point E by measuring along BC and then down parallel to BA 
 
 r 
 
 as indicated in the figure. Join and E. Line FE is a non- 
 isometric line. 
 
 In Fig. 310 point E is located as before. Point T is located 
 by measuring along BC to point S and then parallel to line BD. 
 It is often convenient to think of the object as being placed in a 
 box. This box can be put into isometric and the points in which 
 the object touches it located. Other points can be located by 
 taking measurements parallel to the axes. 
 
 Angles. Angles do not show in their true size in isometric 
 drawings. This is evident from an inspection of Fig. 305 where
 
 PICTURE DRAWING 
 
 133 
 
 the angle at B is 120 and that at C is 60 although on the cube 
 they are both 90. The method of constructing for angles is 
 shown in Fig. 311. First make the orthographic projection, 
 then transfer by taking distances parallel to the axes, as H and L. 
 
 Positions of the Axes. The axes may be placed in any posi- 
 tion provided the angles between them are kept equal to 120 
 as illustrated in Fig. 312. 
 
 Ffg. 317 
 
 Construction for Circles. When circles occur they appear as 
 ellipses and may be drawn by plotting points from the ortho- 
 graphic projection as in Fig. 313 or by the more usual approxima- 
 tion shown in Fig. 314, where the lines are drawn perpendicular 
 to the points of tangency of the circumscribing square. The
 
 134 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 intersections of these perpendiculars locate the centers for circular 
 arcs which will approximate the ellipse sufficiently close for most 
 purposes. In the figure 
 
 TiT z T z Ti = tangent paints 
 Ci = center far arc TiT z and T 3 T 4 
 CiTi = radius for arc TiT 2 and T 3 T t 
 C 2 = center for arc TiT* and T 2 T 3 
 C 2 Ti = radius for arc T^ and T 2 T S 
 
 f/g. 3/8 
 
 The same construction is used for arcs of circles as shown in 
 Fig. 315. 
 
 The interior of objects may be shown by means of isometric 
 sectional views, Fig. 316 and Fig. 317, which are constructed by 
 
 Fig. 319 
 
 the methods already described for exterior views. As shown, the 
 sectioned surfaces are taken on isometric planes.
 
 PICTURE DRAWING 
 
 135 
 
 Oblique Drawing. Another method of picture drawing often 
 useful is oblique drawing or projection, in which the view is 
 obtained by using projection lines oblique to the plane upon which 
 the object is to be represented. In Fig. 318 the orthographic 
 projection of a cube is shown and, on the same plane, the oblique 
 projection of the same cube. The three lines which meet at 
 point B are called oblique axes. Lines BC and AB are always 
 at right angles but the line BD may make any convenient angle 
 
 fig. 320 
 
 with the horizontal. It follows that if one face of an object is 
 parallel to the vertical plane, it will show in its true size and shape. 
 
 After locating the axes the methods of construction given for 
 isometric drawing apply to the making of oblique drawings. 
 Many examples of oblique drawing are given throughout this 
 book. The axes may be located in a variety of ways as shown 
 in Fig. 319. 
 
 The appearance of an object can often be improved by reducing 
 the measurements along the oblique axis, using one half or three 
 fourths of the full dimension. Measurements on the two per- 
 pendicular axes remain unchanged. Two such treatments of 
 a cube are shown in Fig. 320. Such views are called cabinet 
 projection.
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 SHADE LINE DRAWINGS 
 
 Shade Lines. The use of shade lines is a much discussed 
 question. Each drawing has a purpose and if that purpose is 
 better served by the use of shade lines they should be employed. 
 
 In many lines of work detail drawings are never shaded and this 
 seems to be the best practice. Outline drawings or assembly 
 drawings which serve partly, at least, as picture drawings are 
 often improved by shading. 
 
 136
 
 SHADE LINE DRAWINGS 
 
 137 
 
 System in Common Use. In the United States a conven- 
 tional system of shading is generally employed, in which the 
 rays of light are assumed to be parallel, to come from the upper 
 
 f/y 324 F~,g.385 Fig 326 fig. 32 7 Fig 32 a 
 
 Fig. 33 1 Fig. 332 
 
 and left hand corner of the sheet at an angle of 45, and to lie in 
 the plane of the paper. The lower and right hand edges where 
 the light passes over them are made heavy lines called shade 
 lines. When two surfaces are in the same plane the line of division 
 between them is not shaded, Fig. 321. Circles follow the same
 
 138 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 rules as shown, where A is a hole and B is a solid cylinder. In 
 all cases the extra thickness of line is without the surface which 
 
 it bounds (C, Fig. 321). Most all conditions of shading are 
 illustrated in the figures given in this chapter, which should 
 be carefully studied.
 
 SHADE LINE DRAWINGS 
 
 139 
 
 Surface Shading. Various methods of line shading on surfaces 
 are used to show the shape of machine parts. Personal judgment 
 is an important element in the matter of successful surface shad- 
 ing. Fig. 322 shows a cylinder shaded by using fine lines and 
 varying the distances between them. These change approxi- 
 mately as the projections of equally spaced elements of a cylinder. 
 
 . 336 
 
 Another method is to space the shade lines about equally but to 
 vary the width of the lines as in Fig. 323. The air chambers 
 (Figs. 324 to 328) show a number of different ways of shading 
 conical, spherical, and cylindrical surfaces. As shown, either fine 
 lines near together or varying lines may be used with any of the 
 methods illustrated. 
 
 Shading Screw Threads and Gears. On elaborate drawings 
 
 Fig. 330 
 
 r/ff.337 
 
 it is sometimes desirable to shade screw threads. Five ways are 
 shown in Figs. 329 to 332. 
 
 When gears are to be shown without drawing in the teeth the 
 exterior is frequently represented by alternating heavy and fine 
 lines as in Figs. 333 and 334 which show a pair of bevel gears 
 and a pair of spur gears. The rest of the drawing may or may 
 not be shaded. A pair of bevel gears are shown in section in 
 Fig. 335. 
 
 Special Surface Representations. Other surfaces may be 
 represented as in Figs. 336 to 338. Three ways of indicating 
 a knurled surface are given in Fig. 336. For a scraped surface 
 Fig. 337 may be used, and for a polished surface, Fig. 338. 
 
 Patent Office Drawing. Probably the most general use of 
 shaded drawings is for Patent Office work. Such drawings must
 
 140 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 be made on pure white paper of a thickness equal to two or three 
 ply Bristol board, using black ink. The outside dimensions of 
 the sheet are 10 by 15 inches. Inside of this is a one inch margin. 
 At the top of each sheet a clear space of one and one quarter 
 inches must be left for a title which is printed in by the Patent 
 
 Fig. 339 
 
 Office. Fig. 339 shows the layout of a patent drawing. The 
 fewest number of lines should be used; all dimension and center 
 lines should be left off. The plane upon which a section is taken 
 should be indicated. All parts are lettered or numbered. As 
 these drawings are reproduced by the photo zinc process, all lines 
 must be absolutely black and not too fine. If lines #,re too close 
 together they will run together when printed. The "Rules of 
 Practice " of the United States Patent Office may be had for the 
 asking and should be consulted by those interested.
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 DRAWING QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 
 
 MOST of the drawing studies included in this chapter can be 
 worked in an 11" x 14" space or in a division of the space as 
 indicated in Figs. 340 to 343. The layout with dimensions for a 
 regular size sheet is shown in Fig. 340. In some cases a large 
 scale may be advisable in which case the full sheet may be used. 
 An inspection of the problem will indicate the proper space where 
 it is not given in connection with the problem. The order in 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 '- 
 
 4j 
 
 
 
 
 
 (-&, 
 
 
 
 TA CK 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 * 
 I 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 <J3 
 
 
 *""/<?"* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 TRIM LINE-p 
 
 r* 
 
 ! 
 
 WORKING SPACE 
 
 
 
 * ' 
 ( 
 
 * 
 r 
 
 33-BfJ 335 \ 
 1 d/UJ.S 0&033U | 
 
 
 TRIM LINC-J 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 34 O 
 
 which the problems are given can be varied to suit the needs of 
 the class. The question of inking is left for the instructor to de- 
 cide. The author advises that it be delayed until the student 
 has attained considerable proficiency in making pencil drawings. 
 A variety of problems is included to allow a selection to be made 
 and so that the course may be varied from year to year. A 
 number of answers to questions should be neatly written or 
 
 141
 
 142 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 lettered and numerical problems should be carefully worked out 
 to create a coordination between drawing and other subjects, 
 as well as to impress the student with the fact that the mera 
 drawing of lines is not the aim of a drawing course. It is thought 
 
 7*/7* 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 #'*?' 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 */<v 
 
 (tppr-Of) 
 
 ___ 
 
 __/ 
 - 
 
 that such problems may create an interest and stir the student 
 with the ambition to seek an engineering education. 
 
 1. Describe the proper use of the T square. 
 
 2. Show by a sketch the proper method of sharpening a lead 
 pencil. 
 
 3. How are horizontal lines drawn? 
 
 4. How are vertical lines drawn? 
 
 5. Show by sketches the proper adjustment of the pen, pencil, 
 and needle points for a compass. 
 
 6. Draw a straight line. Draw short lines crossing this line, 
 and 2 3 /i 6 // apart. Draw another short line crossing the original 
 line, and I'/w" from the last line drawn. From this lay off 
 further distances of IVs" and 15 /ie". Add the four distances 
 and check the total length by scaling the line. In measuring a 
 line, place the zero of the scale opposite one end of the line and 
 read the scale opposite the other end of the line. 
 
 7. Draw a straight line. Set the dividers at Vie" and step 
 off 10 spaces. Scale the distance thus found and check with the 
 calculated length. 
 
 8. What is the purpose of the knee joints in the compasses? 
 
 9. Examine a drawing material catalog and list five tools in 
 addition to those which you already have, that you would consider 
 convenient for your work. 
 
 10. What kinds of pens are used for freehand lettering? 
 
 11. What kind of ink is used? 
 
 12. What is the slope for slant letters? 
 
 13. In what direction should the pen point? 
 
 14. How is the amount of ink on the pen regulated?
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 143 
 
 15. What hardness of pencil should be used for lettering? 
 
 16. How is the distance between letters regulated? 
 
 17. 11" x 14" space. Starting y 2 " from top border line 
 draw horizontal guide lines 3 /Y' apart. Use very light pencil 
 lines. Make each capital letter of Fig. 15 or 16 five times. Re- 
 peat the letters which cause most trouble. Use 2 H pencil. 
 
 18. 5Y 2 " X 7" space. Starting l / 2 " from top border line 
 draw horizontal guide lines Y 8 " apart. Make each of the lower 
 case letters of Fig. 15 or 16 five times. Height of letters a, c, e, 
 etc. to be V/'. Height of letter 6, k, etc. to be 3 / 8 ". Use 2H 
 pencil. 
 
 19. 5V2" X 1" space. Same as problem 18, but use ball 
 pointed pen. 
 
 20. 5 l /z" X 7" space. Starting l /i" from top border line 
 draw horizontal guide lines V/' apart. Make each capital letter 
 of Fig. 15 or 16 five times. Use 2H pencil. 
 
 21. 5Y 2 " x 7" space. Same as problem 20, but use ball 
 pointed pen. 
 
 22. 5Y 2 " X 7" space. Starting Y 2 " from top of space draw 
 horizontal guide lines Y 8 " apart. Letter the following words, 
 using a 2H pencil: HILL, LATE, LATHE, BOLT, QUENCH, WRENCH, 
 
 EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, CALIPERS 
 
 23. 5VV x 7 space. Same as problem 22, but using pen 
 and ink as directed. 
 
 24. 5 l /z" X 7" space. Draw horizontal guide lines near the 
 middle of the space for letters having l /" caps. Letter the 
 following, using a 2H pencil. Use caps and lower case of Fig. 
 15 or 16. 
 
 "Drawing is the education of the eye, it is more interesting 
 than words. It is the graphic language." 
 
 " Mechanical drawing is the alphabet of the engineer; with- 
 out this the workman is merely a hand, with it he indicates the 
 possession of a head." 
 
 25. Prepare a title and material list for the step bearing shown 
 in Fig. 175. 
 
 26. Same as problem 24, but using pen and ink as directed 
 by the instructor. 
 
 27. Name and illustrate three kinds of triangles. 
 
 28. Name and illustrate three kinds of quadrilaterals. 
 
 29. What is a right angle?
 
 144 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 30. In order that the sills of a house may be square 6 feet has 
 been measured off along one sill and 8 feet along the other. Nails 
 are driven as in Fig. 344 at these points. What will be the dis- 
 tance AC measured along a steel tape when the angle ABC is a 
 right angle? 
 
 31. A circle has a diameter of 2 inches. What is its circum- 
 ference? Compare this distance with the sum of the sides of an 
 inscribed hexagon. 
 
 32. What is an ellipse? 
 
 33. Can a true ellipse be drawn with circular arcs? 
 
 34. Space 4 5 /s" wide, 5 l / 2 " high. Draw a line 2 15 /ie" long 
 and bisect it. See Fig. 32. 
 
 35. Space as for problem 34. Draw an angle and bisect it. 
 See Fig. 33. 
 
 36. Space as for problem 34. Draw a line 2 lz /u" long and 
 divide it into five equal parts, by method of Fig. 34. 
 
 37. Space as for problem 34. Same as problem 36, but use 
 method of Fig. 35. 
 
 38. Space as for problem 34. Draw any angle and construct 
 another angle equal to it. See Fig. 36. 
 
 39. Space as for problem 34. Construct a triangle, having 
 sides as follows: 2 5 / 8 "; SVs"; and 2". See Fig. 37. 
 
 40. Space as for problem 34. Construct an equilateral tri- 
 angle, one side 2 9 /ie" long. See Fig. 38.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 145 
 
 41. Space as for problem 34. Draw an isosceles triangle 
 having a base of 2 7 /8 /r . Sides make 75 with the base. See 
 Fig. 28. 
 
 42. Space as for problem 34. Draw a right triangle. Hy- 
 potenuse 3 l /z" long. One angle is 30. 
 
 43. Space as for problem 34. Mark three points (+) not in 
 a straight line, and draw a circle passing through them. See 
 Fig. 42. 
 
 44. Space as for problem 34. Draw an arc of a circle. Radius 
 2", with center Va" from upper and left hand edges of space. 
 Make the angle AOB (Fig. 43) equal to 45. Find length of the 
 arc. Use first method of Fig. 43. 
 
 45. Space as for problem 34. Same as problem 44, but use 
 second method of Fig. 43. 
 
 46. Space as for problem 34. Draw a circle 2 5 /s" diameter. 
 Draw a tangent at any point on the circumference. See Fig. 44. 
 
 47. Space as for problem 34. Draw an arc with a radius of 
 I 1 //'. Draw a straight line intersecting this arc. Draw an arc 
 tangent to the arc and straight line just drawn, radius 5 /s". See 
 Fig. 45. 
 
 48. Space as for problem 34. Draw a hexagon in a circle 
 having a diameter of 2 7 /s". See Fig. 39. 
 
 49. Space as for problem 34. Draw a hexagon having a 
 measurement across flats (Fig. 39) of 2y 4 ". 
 
 50. Space as for problem 34. Draw a regular octagon inside 
 of a 3 l /s" square, See Fig. 40. 
 
 51. Space as for problem 34. Draw a regular octagon inside 
 of a 3 l / s " circle. 
 
 52. Space as for problem 34. Draw a right triangle having 
 a hypotenuse 3" long, and one side 2" long. Draw a circle pass- 
 ing through the points of the triangle. 
 
 53. Space as for problem 34. Draw a line 3 l /s" long and 
 divide it into parts proportional to 2, 3, and 5. Use a method 
 similar to Fig. 35. 
 
 54. Space as for problem 34. Use 30 X 60 triangle and 
 T square to draw a regular hexagon measuring 3 7 /i 6 " across 
 corners. 
 
 55. Space as for problem 34. Using the 45 triangle and 
 T square draw a regular octagon that will just contain a circle 
 SVie" diameter.
 
 146 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 56. Space 5 l /z" X 7". Draw an ellipse by concentric circle 
 method (Fig. 49). Major axis 5". Minor axis 2". Find 24 
 points. 
 
 57. Space S 1 /*" x 7". Draw an ellipse by trammel method 
 (Fig. 50). Major axis S 1 //'. Minor axis 2 l / 8 ". 
 
 58. Space 5 i /2 /r X 7". Draw a figure having the appearance 
 of an ellipse by circular arcs, Fig. 51. AB = 5", CD = 2 3 /V'. 
 
 59. Space 5 1 /2 // X 7". Draw a V/' square in the center of 
 the space. Draw an involute of this square. 
 
 60. Space 5 l /z" X 7". Draw a semi-circle having its center 
 V/' from the left edge of the space and 3 1 /4 // down from the top 
 
 rig. 
 
 of the space. Radius of circle PA". Draw the involute of the 
 semi-circle. See Fig. 53. 
 
 61. Space 5 1 /*" X 7". Draw a parabola, Fig. 54. Distance 
 AF = 7 / 8 ". Directrix perpendicular. 
 
 62. Space 5 l /z" X 7". Draw a parabola, Fig. 54. Directrix 
 horizontal. Distance AF - l /i". 
 
 63. Space 5 l /z" X 7". Draw an equilateral hyperbola, Fig. 
 56. Point P is 1" from line OG and 2V 8 " from OH. Make 
 distances PA, AB, etc. Y 4 ". 
 
 64. Space 5Y 2 " X 7". Draw the two views given and the 
 side view of the prism, Fig. 345.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 147 
 
 65. Space 5 1 /2 // X 7". Draw the two views given and the 
 top view of Fig. 346. 
 
 rig. 349 
 
 L 
 
 Fig. 351 
 
 Fig. 352 
 
 66. Space 5 l /z" X 1" . Draw the two views given and the 
 top view of Fig. 347. 
 
 67. Space 5 1 /z" X 7". Draw the top, front, and side views 
 of a regular hexagonal prism, 
 
 Fig. 348. Corners of hex 2 1 /*". 
 Height of prism .V 2 ". 
 
 68. Space S 1 /*" x 7". Draw 
 three views of the object shown 
 in Fig. 349. 
 
 69. Space 5 '/Y' X 1" '. Draw 
 three views of the object shown 
 in Fig. 350. 
 
 70. Space 5 l / 2 " x 1". Draw 
 three views of the object shown 
 in Fig. 351. 
 
 71. Space S 1 /^" x 7". Draw 
 
 three views of the object shown in Fig. 352. 
 
 72. Space o'/Y' X 7". Draw three views of the object shown 
 in Fig. 353.
 
 148 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 VIW 
 
 ' */' 
 
 _JL 
 
 *>i, 
 
 F/g. 356 
 
 ! j ! i a i * 
 
 n'g.357 
 
 Fig. 3 59 
 
 F/g. 36 O 
 
 1 ^/ 
 
 Fig. 36 7
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 149 
 
 73. Space 5y 2 " X 7". Draw three views of the object shown 
 in Fig. 354. 
 
 74. Space 5 l /t" X 7". Draw three views of the object sjiown 
 in Fig. 355. 
 
 75. Space 5y 2 " X 7". Draw 
 three views of the object shown 
 in Fig. 356. 
 
 76. Space S 1 //' x 7". Draw 
 three views of the object shown 
 
 in Fig. 357. , /. 
 
 77. Space 5 l / 2 " X 7". Draw -|f| 2j \ IP- 
 three views of the object shown Fig. 362 
 in Fig. 358. 
 
 78. Space 5y 2 " X 7". Draw three views of the object shown 
 in Fig. 359. 
 
 EEi 
 
 rig. 365 
 
 79. Space 5 1 /2 // X 7". Draw three views of the object shown 
 in Fig. 360. 
 
 80. Space 5 l /z" X 7". Draw three views of the object shown 
 in Fig. 361.
 
 150 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Draw 
 
 object 
 
 Draw 
 
 object 
 
 81. Space5V 2 "x7". Draw 
 three views of the object 
 shown in Fig. 362. 
 
 82. Space 5Y2" X 7". 
 three views of the 
 shown in Fig. 363. 
 
 83. Space 5 1 /*" X 1" . 
 three views of the 
 shown in Fig. 364. 
 
 84. Space 5Va" X 7". Draw 
 three views of the object 
 shown in Fig. 365. 
 
 The drawing of objects in 
 other than their natural posi- 
 tions furnishes excellent prac- 
 tice in the study of projections. 
 It is a useful test of one's knowledge of the theory of drawing, and 
 every student should have some experience with such problems. 
 The method of solution for such problems calls for the loca- 
 tion of each point in its three views and particular attention to 
 relations of the lines. 
 
 Three views of a hopper are shown in Fig. 366. When the 
 topper is revolved to 30 about shaft A A, the front view will
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBL 
 
 151 
 
 show as in Fig. 367. The top view is obtained by projecting 
 horizontally from the top view of Fig. 366 and vertically from the 
 front view of Fig. 367. The front view of Fig. 367 is changed 
 only in the position of the hopper. In the top view the distances 
 parallel to the shaft A A have not been changed, as the revolu- 
 tion has been about this axis. The side view of Fig. 367 is then 
 obtained in the usual manner from the top and front views. 
 
 With the apparatus in the position of Fig. 367, it may be re- 
 volved about the shaft BB forward or backward. In this case 
 
 /=~/'g.369 
 
 rig. 370 
 
 Pig. 37 1 
 
 rig. 372 
 
 the side view of Fig. 367 will be unchanged except for its position 
 as shown in Fig. 368. After drawing the side view the front 
 view may be drawn by projecting across from the side view and 
 down from the front and top views of Fig. 367. This is possible 
 because the horizontal distances in the front view are parallel to 
 the shaft or axis of revolution. The top view is obtained from 
 the other two views in the usual way. 
 
 85. Space 5VY' X 1". Draw three views of the hexagonal 
 pyramid in the position shown in Fig. 369. 
 
 86. Space 5 l / 2 " X 1". Draw three views of the pyramid of 
 Problem 85 after it has been revolved as shown in Fig. 370. 
 
 87. Space 5 l / 2 " X 7". Draw three views of the rectangular 
 prism in the position shown in Fig. 371.
 
 152 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 /i" X 7". Draw three views of the rectangular 
 prism after it has been revolved from the position of Fig. 371 
 about a vertical axis. Top view is shown in Fig. 372. 
 
 89. Space 5y 2 " X 1". Draw three views and a complete 
 auxiliary view of the square prism shown in Fig. 373, after it has 
 been cut by plane A-A and the part above the plane removed. 
 
 90. Space 5y 2 " X 7". Draw two views and a complete 
 auxiliary view of the hexagonal prism shown in Fig. 374, after it 
 has been cut by plane A-A. 
 
 Fig. 374 
 
 Fig. 3 75 
 
 Fig. 376 
 
 91. Space 5y 2 " X 7". Draw the two views given and a 
 complete auxiliary view, Fig. 375. 
 
 92. Space 5 1 // X 7". Draw the two views given and a com- 
 plete auxiliary view, Fig. 376. 
 
 93. Space 5y 2 " X 7". Draw a complete auxiliary view, Fig. 
 377. 
 
 94. Space 5 1 / 2 // X 1". Draw a complete auxiliary view, Fig. 
 378. 
 
 95. Space 11" x 14". Draw the two views shown and an 
 auxiliary view of the foot pedal shown in Fig. 379. 
 
 96. Space 11" x 14". Complete the views and draw an aux- 
 iliary view of the molding, Fig. 380. 
 
 97. Why are sectional views used? 
 
 98. What is the relation of a sectional view to the other views?
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 153 
 
 Fig. 377 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 - 
 
 \ 
 
 99. Space S 1 /*" X 7". Draw a sectional view of Fig. 381 on 
 a plane through the axis. 
 
 100. Space 5 l /z" X 7". Draw a sectional view of Fig. 382 on 
 a plane through the axis.
 
 154 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Fig. 360 
 
 101. Space 5Y 2 " X 7", Draw a sectional view of Fig. 383 on 
 a plane through the axis. 
 
 102. Space 5 l / t " X 7". Draw three views of Fig. 384, chang- 
 ing the proper view to a section on plane A- A. 
 
 103. Space 5y 2 " X 7". Draw two views of Fig. 385, chang- 
 ing the proper view to a section on plane A-A.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 155 
 
 EH 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 n g . set 
 
 104. Space o 1 /^" X 7". Draw three views of Fig. 386, chang- 
 ing the proper view to a section on plane A- A . 
 
 105. Space 5 l / 2 " x 7". Draw three views of Fig. 387, chang- 
 ing the proper view to a section on plane A- A. 
 
 106. Space 11" x 14". Draw three views of the slide valve, 
 Fig. 388. The missing view to be a section on plane A- A. 
 
 107. Draw three views of the shackle, Fig. 186.
 
 156 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 ig. 363 
 
 108. Space 11" X 14". Draw 
 a plan view and a sectional ele- 
 vation for the elliptical cover 
 plate shown in Fig. 389. Out- 
 side dimensions 7" x 9". Six 
 u /i 6 inch holes for bolts. The 
 rise in the center is elliptical in 
 plan. The bolts are to be spaced 
 equal distances apart. Draw 
 full size. 
 
 109. 11" X 14" space. Draw 
 Ffg.389\ two views of the crank shown 
 
 in Fig. 390. This drawing is excellent as an inking or tracing 
 exercise.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 157 
 
 110. Compare briefly wrought iron and cast iron. 
 
 111. What is cast iron? Name some of its properties. Com- 
 pare its strength in tension and compression. 
 
 112. What is wrought iron? How is it made? Name some of 
 its properties. 
 
 113. What is steel? How is it made? Name some of its 
 properties. 
 
 114. What material is used for bolts and nuts? 
 
 115. How is malleable iron made and what is it used for? 
 
 116. Of what material would you make the following and why? 
 
 a. Steam Engine Cylinder. 
 
 6. Water Pump Plunger. 
 
 c. Piston-rod. 
 
 d. Complicated form of Lever. 
 
 e. Shaft. 
 
 117. What is meant by unit stress? Axial stress? Compres- 
 sion? Tension? Shear? 
 
 118. A tie-bar has a diameter of 7 /Y' and supports a load of 
 8000 pounds. What is the unit stress? 
 
 119. What load will a rectangular tension member measuring 
 3 /s" X I" carry safely if it is made of wrought iron? (Live load.) 
 
 120. A hollow cast iron cylinder has diameters of 4" and 3". 
 What safe compressive load will it carry if the load is steady? 
 
 121. Compute the number of 3 /4" bolts for a cylinder head 15" 
 effective diameter. Steam pressure is 150 pounds per square 
 inch. Allowable working stress on bolts is 5000 pounds per 
 square inch. The effective root area of a 3 /Y' bolt is .302 square 
 inches. 
 
 122. A wrought iron bolt iVa" diameter has a head I 1 //' long. 
 Its effective diameter is 1.284. When a tension of 14000 pounds 
 is applied to the bolt, find the unit stress. 
 
 123. What are some of the uses of screw threads? 
 
 124. What advantage has the acme thread over the square 
 thread? 
 
 125. A triple threaded screw has a pitch of 1 / 3 inch. How many 
 turns must it make to move a nut 6 inches? 
 
 126. Express the following in terms of the diameter of the 
 bolt; distance across flats of hex, thickness of bolt head, and 
 thickness of nut.
 
 158 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 127. In what way does a bolt head differ from a nut? 
 
 128. Draw a I" hex nut across flats and a 1" square nut across 
 corners. Compare them. 
 
 129. Space 5 1 /z" X 7". Draw one turn each of two helices as 
 started in Fig. 391. 
 
 130. Space 5 l / 2 " X 7". Draw the exterior of a square threaded 
 screw 3" long which enters 1" into the section of a square threaded 
 nut. Pitch I". Other dimensions as in Fig. 392. 
 
 Fig. 3 92 V//////////A : 
 
 BCD 
 
 F/g.393 
 
 H\ l\ 
 
 \F~fg. 394\ 
 
 131. Space 5 l /z" X 7", Draw four forms of screw threads in 
 section as directed by the instructor. 1" pitch. Fig. 393. 
 
 132. Space S 1 /?" X 1" . Fig. 394. At A, E, and C, draw 
 three different plan views of threaded holes. At D and E draw 
 two different representations of threaded holes in elevation. 
 At F draw a threaded hole in section. At G, H, and /, draw 
 three conventional representations of threaded bolt ends. Diam- 
 eter for all representations to be 1 inch. 
 
 133. Space 5Va" x 7". On axis A-B, Fig. 395, draw a 3 A" 
 through bolt, hex head across corners and hex nut across flats. 
 On axis C-D draw a P/s" bolt, hex head across flats and hex nut 
 across corners. Indicate required dimensions. 
 
 134. Space 5Va" x 1" '. On axis A-B, Fig. 396, draw a 7 /s" 
 bolt, square head across corners and square nut across flats.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 159 
 
 On axis C-D draw a Vs" cap screw, head across flats. On axis 
 E-F draw a 7 /V' cap screw, head across corners. 
 
 135. Space 5 1 /2 // X 7". Draw the two views of collar and 
 
 -*.n-f 
 
 395 
 
 h/Hih. 
 
 shaft, Fig. 397. On axis A-Z? draw a 6 /s" set screw, head across 
 flats. On axis C-D draw same set screw, head across corners. 
 
 136. Space 5 l /z" X 1" Draw the gland and stuffing box of 
 Fig. 398. On axis A-B draw a VY' stud and nut. Show nut 
 across flats. Make provision 
 
 for the gland to enter one half 
 the depth of the stuffing box 
 when nut is screwed onto stud. 
 Show required dimensions. 
 
 137. Draw a plan and sec- 
 tion for a double riveted lap 
 joint as directed by the in- 
 structor. 
 
 138. Make a scale drawing of two plates joined together at 
 right angles. 
 
 139. Space 5y 2 " X 7". Draw sections on planes X and Y 
 and a development of the riveted joint of Fig. 399. See Chapter 
 VIII. Vie" plates; 15 /ie" rivets; pitch 2 7 /i 6 "; lap I 1 /*"; scale 
 3" = 1 foot. 
 
 140. How many views should a drawing contain?
 
 160 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 mi 
 
 141. What scales are in general 
 use for working drawings? 
 
 142. What are the first lines 
 inked on a working drawing? 
 
 143. Is true projection always 
 used? Explain. 
 
 144. Sketch and describe one 
 form of stuffing box. 
 
 145. Space 11" X 14". Make 
 a working drawing showing three 
 views of the slide valve shown in 
 Fig. 400. One view may be a sec- 
 tion. Completely dimension. 
 
 146. Space 11" x 14". Make 
 a working drawing of the bearing 
 cap of Fig. 401. Show three views. 
 
 4OQ Completely dimension. One view 
 
 may be a section. Supply any 
 dimensions. See Chapter XV for size of 1 /4 // pipe.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 161 
 
 147. Make detail working drawings for the parts of the eccen- 
 tric shown in Fig. 402. Supply any missing dimensions. Draw- 
 ing should include a properly dimensioned bolt and set screw. 
 Completely dimension the drawing. 
 
 148. Make detail working drawings for the parts of the step 
 bearing shown in Fig. 175. Scale 6" = 1 foot. Use two sheets, 
 11" x 14" space. Completely dimension.
 
 162 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 149. Draw two views of Fig. 403. Each view should show 
 true distances. Completely dimension. Submit a preliminary 
 sketch to the instructor. 
 
 150. Make a working drawing for the piece shown in Fig. 404. 
 Submit a preliminary sketch to the instructor. 
 
 151. Space 5Y 2 " X 7". Make a detail working drawing of 
 the construction shown in Fig. 405, using one full view and such 
 parts of other views as are necessary to define its true shape. 
 
 152. Space 5Y 2 " X 7". Make a working drawing of the sleeve, 
 Fig. 406. One half view to be in section. 
 
 153. Make a working drawing of the valve shown in Fig. 407. 
 Show a proper treatment for a section on plane ABC. 
 
 154. Draw a sectional view of Fig. 408. 
 
 155. Make a detail drawing of the valve body of Fig. 409. 
 One view in section. 
 
 156. Make an assembly drawing of the 2" check valve shown 
 in Fig. 409. Draw a sectional elevation and an exterior end view. 
 This drawing may or may not be dimensioned.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 163 
 
 157. The filling-in piece, Fig. 410, is shown one half size. 
 Scale the figure, draw full size, and completely dimension. 
 
 158. The guide, Fig. 411, is shown one half size. Scale the 
 figure, draw full size, and completely dimension. 
 
 Pig. 407 
 
 Scale the 
 
 Draw 
 
 159. The bracket, Fig. 412, is shown one half size, 
 figure, draw full size, and completely dimension. 
 
 160. The flywheel, Fig. 413, is shown one fourth size, 
 to a scale of 6" = 1 foot, and completely dimension. 
 
 161. The bearing, Fig. 414, is shown one half size. Scale the 
 figure, draw full size, complete the 
 
 views, and completely dimension. 
 
 162. Draw a half end view and 
 a sectional elevation of the pump 
 centerpiece, Fig. 415. Choose a 
 proper scale and completely dimen- 
 sion. 
 
 163. Space 5 l / 2 " X 7". Draw 
 two views of the lever shown in 
 Fig. 416. Both views are to show 
 the true size of the lever. 
 
 164. Make detail drawings of 
 each part of the screw stuffing box 
 of Fig. 417. Note that dotted 
 
 sectioning is used here to indicate the separate pieces. This 
 method is sometimes used to show the exterior and section in the 
 same view. 
 
 165. Make an assembly working drawing of the steam jacketed 
 kettle shown in Fig. 418. Draw a half top view and a sectional
 
 164 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 165 
 
 F~ig. 410 
 
 elevation. Such dimensions as are 
 not given are to be supplied by 
 the student. The required bolts 
 are to be drawn and specified. 
 The bosses for the pipe may be 
 about twice the outside diameter 
 of the pipe. Com- 
 pletely dimension the 
 drawing. The outer 
 casing is supported by 
 four "feet" shown pic- 
 torially. The flange of 
 the kettle rests upon 
 the flange of the outer 
 casing, and is bolted 
 to it. Scale I 1 /*" = 1 
 foot. Space ll"x 14". 
 
 166. At what stage 
 should the dimension 
 lines be put on a draw- 
 ing? 
 
 167. Make an assem- 
 bly working drawing 
 from the details of the 
 connecting rod shown 
 in Fig. 419. Draw one 
 view in full and the 
 other half in section 
 
 and half full. Choose a suitable scale. 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 1 
 
 Six Arms 
 
 ^ 
 
 * 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 \ 
 
 V 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 $$ 
 
 
 
 Fig. 4-13 
 
 of the rod may be broken out. 
 
 If necessary a portion 
 Supply required bolts for wedge
 
 166 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Fig. 414- 
 
 block. Submit sketch of treatment to instructor for approval. 
 Completely dimension. 
 
 168. Make a drawing for the steam cylinder shown in Fig. 420 
 as follows. Sectional elevation on plane A- A; half top view; 
 and section on plane B-B looking toward the left. The three
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 167 
 
 views are to be properly located and completely dimensioned. 
 Show depth of tapped holes. Supply any necessary dimensions 
 that are not given in the figure. Choose a suitable scale. 
 
 169. Compute the weight of 
 the Vee block shown in Fig. 335. 
 Tabulate all figures. 
 
 170. Compute the weight of 
 the cast iron foot for the steam 
 kettle, Fig. 418. Tabulate all 
 figures. 
 
 171. Compute the weight of 
 the outer casing for Fig. 418. 
 (cast iron). Tabulate all figures. 
 
 172. Compute the weight for the kettle, Fig. 418 (cast iron). 
 Tabulate all figures. 
 
 173. Compute the weight of the cast iron pulley shown in 
 Fig. 421. Tabulate all figures. 
 
 174. How is the diameter of wrought pipe specified? 
 
 // Thds. U.S.Std 
 
 T WAVs/l/s- \ 
 
 Fig. 
 
 175. Sketch a 2" X 2" x IVY' Tee, and mark the size on each 
 opening. 
 
 176. Sketch a cross section of a standard pipe thread. Indi- 
 cate any special features. 
 
 177. Draw two views of the piping shown in Fig. 422; one 
 view as shown and the other in the direction of the arrow. Use 
 a double line representation. See Chapter XV. 
 
 178. Space 7" x 11". Find the curve of intersection between 
 the two cylinders, Fig. 423.
 
 168 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 -0/ 
 f-\ 
 
 
 
 
 \J 
 
 1 
 
 
 xl 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 ' ^1 

 
 QUESTIONS, STUDIES, AND PROBLEMS 169 
 
 179. Space 1" x 11". Find the curve of intersection between 
 the two cylinders, Fig. 424. 
 
 180. Space 5Y 2 " X 1". Find the intersection between the 
 prisms of Fig. 425. 
 
 181. Space S 1 /^" X 7". Find the intersection between the 
 two prisms of Fig. 426. 
 
 182. Find the line of intersection between the two cylinders. 
 (Fig. 294, first case.) Both diameters I 1 A". Altitude 2Y/'. 
 Axes intersect. 
 
 183. Same as Problem 182 but axes l / 2 " apart. 
 
 184. Find the intersection between two cones (Fig. 294, second 
 case). Diameters lYs" and altitude 2 3 /s". Axes intersect. 
 
 185. Same as Problem 184 but with axes l / 2 " apart. 
 
 186. Find the intersection of a cone and a cylinder (Fig. 294 
 third case). Diameter of cone = lYa". Diameter of cylinder 
 
 = I 1 / 4". Axes intersect. Altitude 2 l /z". 
 
 187. Same as Problem 186 but with axes 1 / 2 " apart. 
 
 188. Find the intersection of a cone and a cylinder (Fig. 
 294, fourth case). Diameter of cone 3". Altitude of cone 3". 
 Diameter of cylinder 1". Axes intersect. 
 
 189. Same as Problem 188 but with axes 1 / 2 " apart.
 
 170 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 190. Space SVa" X 7". Find the line of intersection between 
 the cone and hexagonal prism of Fig. 427. 
 
 191. Space 5Y2" x 7". Find the line of intersection between 
 the sphere and hexagonal prism of Fig. 428.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 171 
 
 -I 
 
 \ 
 
 30\ 
 
 Fig. 4 2''
 
 172 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 429 
 
 8T '* k- 
 
 Fig. 
 
 192. Find the line of intersection between the cone and cylinder 
 of Fig. 429. 
 
 193. Make a working drawing of the joint shown in Fig. 430. 
 Find curves accurately. 
 
 194. Make a drawing for a connecting rod end (Fig. 295) with 
 dimensions as follows. Instructor will assign dimensions.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 173 
 
 I. W = 2V 2 " 
 II. W = 3" 
 III. W = 
 
 H =4" 
 
 rr o// 
 fl = O 
 
 A = iV 
 
 A = 2" 
 A = 
 
 LU. 
 
 H r 
 
 fig. 
 
 v^j^- 
 
 LI 
 
 "I* Ffg.^-32 
 
 LJ_ 
 
 4 
 
 h'a 1 
 
 / A \ 
 
 195. Space 5Y 2 " X 7". Develop the lateral surface of the 
 rectangular prism, Fig. 431. 
 
 196. Space 5y 2 " X 7". Develop the lateral surface of the 
 hexagonal prism, Fig. 432.
 
 174 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 Fig. 439 
 
 Fig. 
 
 m 
 
 / / <vi 
 
 B' 
 
 Fig. 
 
 197. Space 5 l / z " x 1". Develop the lateral surface and the 
 upper surface of the cylinder, Fig. 433. 
 
 198. Space 5Y 2 " x 1". Develop the vertical piece of the 
 square elbow, Fig. 434. 
 
 199. Space 5 l / 2 " X 7". Develop the lateral surface of the 
 pyramid, Fig. 435. 
 
 200. Space 5 l / 2 " x 7". Develop the lateral surface of the 
 frustum of a pyramid, Fig. 436.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 175 
 
 201. Space 5 l /z" X 7". Develop the lateral surface and the 
 cut face of the hexagonal pyramid, Fig. 437. 
 
 202. Space &/*" X 1" . Develop the lateral surface of the 
 pyramid, Fig. 438. 
 
 203. Find the area in square feet of the surface of the tent, 
 
 Fig. 439. 
 
 Width Length Height 
 
 Size in in in 
 
 Feet Feet Feet 
 
 1777 
 II 9 12 7 1 /* 
 
 204. Find the area in square feet of the surface of the tent, Fig. 
 440. 
 
 - H f| t ot W 5Sf 
 
 13 777 
 
 II 3V 2 16 12 7 1 /* 
 
 III 4 20 14 9 
 
 IV 5 24 16 11 
 
 205. Find the area in square feet of the surface of the tent, 
 Fig. 441. 
 
 Size I 7 feet square 7 feet high 
 
 II 9 " 8 " 
 
 206. Find the area in square feet of the surface of the tent, 
 Fig. 442. 
 
 Size 
 
 Size of 
 
 Size of 
 
 Height Height 
 
 Base 
 
 Top 
 
 at Center at Side 
 
 Feet 
 
 Feet 
 
 Feet Feet 
 
 7 square 
 
 2 l /z square 
 
 7 i /z 6 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 8 6 l / 2 
 
 I 
 II 
 
 III 10 " 3Y 2 " 9 7V 
 
 207. Space 5 l / 2 " x 7". Develop the circular cone shown in 
 Fig. 443. Start with element A B. 
 
 208. Space 5 l / z " X 7". Develop the part of the surface of 
 cone above the plane CD, Fig. 444. Start with element A B. 
 
 209. Develop the portion of a conical surface shown in Fig. 
 445. First lay out the true length triangles. Then start with 
 element A B. 
 
 210. Develop the transition piece of Fig. 446. 
 
 211. Develop the transition piece of Fig. 447.
 
 176 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 One ha/f ' c/ere/opment 
 
 r 
 
 Pig. 
 
 212. Find the intersection of the two cylinders in the three 
 views, Fig. 448. Develop each of the cylinders. 
 
 213. Space 572" X 7". Make an isometric drawing of the 
 brass bushing shown in Fig. 175, in section. Full size. 
 
 214. Space 11" X 14". Make an isometric drawing of the 
 main casting of Fig. 175, in section. Full size.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 177 
 
 215. Make an isometric drawing of Fig. 195. Dimensions as 
 furnished by the instructor. 
 
 A = [ ] D* = [ ] A = [ ] A = [ ] A = [ ] D, = [ ] 
 Li - [ ] L z = [ ] L 3 = [ ] L 4 = [ ] L 5 = [ ] L 6 = [ ]. 
 
 216. Space 5V2" x 7". Make an isometric section of a [ ] 
 diameter rivet and part of two plates each [ ] inches, thick. 
 
 Dimensions will be furnished by instructor. For forms of rivets 
 see Figs. 133, 134, and 135. 
 
 217. Space S 1 /^" X 7". Make an isometric drawing of the 
 object shown in Fig. 152. Scale 6" = 1 foot. 
 
 218. Space 5 l / 2 " X 7". Make a cabinet projection from Fig. 
 152. Scale 6" = 1 foot, 
 
 219. Space 5Y 2 " X 7". For scale of 6" = 1 foot. Space 
 11" x 14" for full size. Make an isometric drawing of the bear- 
 ing cap shown in Fig. 174. 
 
 220. Space b l /z" X 7". Make an isometric drawing of Fig. 
 275. Scale 6" = 1 foot. 
 
 221. Space 5 l /z" X 7". Make an oblique drawing of Fig. 
 275. Scale 6" = 1 foot. 
 
 222. Make an oblique drawing of Fig. 273. 
 
 223. Make an oblique drawing in section of Fig. 276. Outside 
 diameter = 4VY'. Width = 1 inch.
 
 178 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 -Knurled 
 
 224. Space 5 l / 2 " X 7". Make an oblique drawing in section 
 of Fig. 277. Scale 6" = 1 foot. 
 
 225. Space 5 1 /*" X 7". Make an isometric drawing in section 
 of Fig. 277. 
 
 Shade lines may be used on most any of the problems at the 
 discretion of the instructor. 
 
 226. Where should the extra thickness of a shade line be 
 allowed for? 
 
 227. About how wide should the 
 shade lines be compared with the 
 fine lines on a shaded drawing. 
 
 228. Make a drawing of Fig. 
 449, half in section, and half ex- 
 terior. On the exterior half repre- 
 sent the knurled surface. 
 
 229. Refer to Machinery, Power, 
 American Machinist, or other tech- 
 nical papers and make a freehand 
 copy of a simple drawing. Give 
 
 44-9 reference, Paper 
 
 Date Vol No Page 
 
 Give your criticism, favorable and unfavorable. Consider choice 
 of views; ease of reading and clearness; method of dimensioning; 
 location of dimensions; notes and other information. 
 
 Inking Exercises. Practice exercises are sometimes valuable 
 as a means of teaching accuracy, and for inking practice. The 
 following problems are designed for such purposes. They may 
 be inked with all lines of uniform weight, or with fine and heavy 
 lines as shown. Sharp pencil lines and a minimum of erasing 
 should be insisted upon. When inking, no erasures should be 
 allowed. 
 
 230. Exercise 1, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square. Divide the 
 side AC into 12 equal parts, using the bow spacers. Through 
 each point draw horizontal lines using the T square. 
 
 231 . Exercise 2, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square. Divide CD 
 into 12 equal parts with the dividers. Draw vertical lines through 
 each point using a triangle and the T square. 
 
 232. Exercise 3, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square. Divide AC, 
 CD, and BD each into 6 equal parts. Draw BC. Draw lines 
 through the points as shown, using the 45 triangle.
 
 QUESTIONS, PROBLEMS, AND STUDIES 179 
 
 233. Exercise 4, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square. From each 
 corner draw lines making 30 and 60 with the horizontal. Use 
 the 30 x 60 triangle. Stop the lines so as to form the figure 
 shown. 
 
 234. Exercise 5, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square. Divide CD 
 and BD into 6 equal parts. Draw lines from point C to each 
 
 9 10 II 
 
 Fig. 450 
 
 point on line BD. Draw Hues from point B to each point on 
 line CD. 
 
 235. Exercise 6, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square. Divide A B 
 and AC each into 12 equal parts. Draw very light horizontal and 
 vertical lines through each point. Brighten up the lines so as to 
 form the figure shown. 
 
 236. Exercise 7, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square, a 3 1 //' square, 
 and a 2 l / 2 " square as shown in the figure. Join the middle points 
 of the 4" square. Join the middle points of the 3> l /\" square. 
 Erase the lines which are not required. 
 
 237. Exercise 8, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square. Draw AD 
 and BC. Divide AD and BC each into 8 equal parts. Join
 
 180 ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 
 
 each point with the corners of the square. When inking be sure 
 to draw toward the corners and allow each line to dry before 
 drawing a second line. 
 
 238. Exercise 9, Fig. 450. Draw horizontal and vertical center 
 lines. Using their intersection as a center draw a circle with a 
 diameter of 4". Divide the radius into 6 equal parts. Through 
 each point thus found draw circles as indicated. 
 
 239. Exercise 10, Fig. 450. Draw horizontal and vertical 
 center lines. Draw concentric circles having diameters as follows: 
 4", 3Y/', 2Y 2 ", I 3 /*", and 1". Divide the 2Y 2 " circle into 8 
 equal parts and using each point as a center draw small tangent 
 circles having a diameter of 3 /Y' as shown in the figure. 
 
 240. Exercise 11, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square. Join the 
 middle points of each side by lines HF and EG. Using E, F, G, 
 and H as centers, and a radius of 2", draw semicircles. Using 
 same centers, and a radius of \ l /%", draw circle arcs. Erase lines 
 not required to form the figure. 
 
 241. Exercise 12, Fig. 450. Lay out a 4" square. Round 
 the corners with a 1 /z" radius. Find point E, the center of the 
 square. With E as a center, draw a circle having a radius of 
 Ya". With E as a center draw two semicircles, having radii of 
 3 /Y' and \ l /z" Join these semicircles with small circles having 
 a radius of 3 /&". Complete the figure as shown.
 
 INDEX 
 
 Acme thread, 42 
 Alternate sectioning, 76 
 Angles, 13 
 
 isometric, 132 
 Angle, to bisect, 16 
 
 to copy, 16 
 
 Approximate ellipse, 21 
 Arcs and straight lines, 94 
 Arcs, tangent, 18, 19 
 Arrow heads, 77 
 Assembly drawings, 66 
 A. S. M. E. sectioning, 30 
 Auxiliary views, 28 
 Axes, isometric, 133 
 
 oblique, 135 
 
 Bearings, sliding, 90 
 Bessemer process, 34 
 Bill of material, 12 
 Blue prints, 70 
 Bolts and screws, 48 
 Bolts, U. S. Stardard, 48 
 Butt joints, 58 
 Buttress thread, 42 
 
 Cabinet projection, 135 
 Calculations of weights of materials, 
 
 107 
 
 Calking, 59 
 Cap, nuts, 53 
 
 screws, 53 
 
 Castings, weights of, 106 
 Cast iron, 31 
 
 properties of, 32 
 Checking drawings, 85 
 Circle, involute of, 22 
 
 to draw through three points, 18 
 Circle arc, length of, 18 
 Circles, 14 
 
 isometric, 133 
 Commercial gothic letters, 7 
 
 Compasses, use of, 3 
 
 Cone, development of, 128 
 
 Cones, intersection of, 120 
 
 Connecting rod intersections, 121 
 
 Constructions, 13 
 
 Conventional representation of screw 
 
 threads, 44 
 Cross hatching, 30 
 Curves, applications, 93 
 Cut surfaces, representation of, 30 
 Cutting plane, 30 
 Cutting plane, choice of, 120 
 Cylinder, development of, 126 
 Cylinder head, weight of, 109 
 Cylinders, intersection of, 120 
 
 Detail drawings, 62 
 
 special, 63 
 Development of cone, 128 
 
 of cylinder, 126 
 
 of prism, 124 
 
 of pyramid, 126 
 
 of transition piece, 128 
 Developments, 123 
 Diagram drawings, 68 
 
 sketches, 104 
 Dimensioning, 77 
 
 elements of, 78 
 
 general rules, 79 
 
 shafting, 83 
 
 small parts, 85 
 
 systems, 80 
 
 tapers, 84 
 Dimension lines, 77 
 Dimensions, location of, 81 
 
 of pipe fittings, 115 
 
 of pipe flanges, 116 
 
 of standard pipe, 114 
 
 purpose of, 77 
 Dividers, use of, 4 
 Dotted lines, 27 
 
 181
 
 182 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Dotted sections, 163, 167 
 Drawing, cabinet, 135 
 
 isometric, 130 
 
 oblique, 135 
 
 picture, 130 
 
 Drawing, isometric, 130 
 Drawings, assembly, 66 
 
 assembly working, 66 
 
 checking, 85 
 
 detail, 62 
 
 diagram, 68 
 
 erection, 66 
 
 how to make, 65 
 
 how to make isometric, 131 
 
 outline, 66 
 
 part assembly, 66 
 
 patent office, 139 
 
 purpose of, 23 
 
 shade line, 136 
 
 show, 68 
 
 special detail, 63 
 
 working, 62 
 
 Drilling for flanges, 69, 82, 95 
 Drills, 87 
 
 Elastic limit, 37 
 
 table, 38 
 
 Elasticity, modulus of, 37 
 Ellipse, 19, 20, 21 
 
 approximate, 21 
 
 tangent to, 19 
 Engine, parts of steam, 88 
 Equilateral triangle, 17 
 Erection drawings, 66 
 Estimation of weights, 105 
 
 of castings, 106 
 
 of f orgings, 111 
 
 of Ioo33 materials, 106 
 Exceptions to true projection, 69 
 
 Factor of safety, 37 
 
 table of, 39 
 Fillets, 93 
 
 Finish, methods of indicating, 78, 85 
 Fittings, pipe, 112, 113 
 Flange edges, 95 
 Flanged projections, 94 
 
 Flanges, dimensions of pipe, 116 
 
 drilling, 69, 82, 95 
 Flanges and bolting, 95 
 Forgings, weights of, 111 
 Forms of letters, 8 
 
 Gears, shading of, 139 
 Geometry, 13 
 Glands, 92 
 Gray iron, 31 
 
 Helix, 40 
 
 Hexagon, to construct, 17 
 
 Hyperbola, 22 
 
 Imaginary cutting plane, 30 
 Inking, exercises, 178 
 
 order of, 65 
 Instruments, drawing, 1 
 
 measuring, 100 
 Intersections, 117 
 
 connecting rod, 121 
 
 cylinders, 120 
 
 prisms, 118 
 
 visibility of, 119 
 Invisible surfaces, representation of, 
 
 27 
 Involute, of circle, 22 
 
 of triangle, 21 
 Iron, cast, 31 
 
 malleable, 34 
 
 wrought, 33 
 Isometric axes, 133 
 
 drawing, 130 
 
 drawing, how to make, 131 
 
 Joints, butt, 58 
 lap, 57 
 
 Keys, 96 
 Knuckle thread, 41 
 
 Lap joints, 57 
 Left-hand screw, 41 
 Lettering, 7 
 Letter spacing, 10 
 Line, to bisect, 15 
 
 to divide into equal parts, 16 
 Line shading, 137, 139
 
 INDEX 
 
 183 
 
 Lines, arcs and straight, 94 
 
 character of, 5 
 
 dotted, 27 
 
 dimension, 77 
 
 isometric, 131 
 
 non-isometric, 131 
 
 of intersection, 117 
 
 shade, 136 
 
 Loads and stresses, 35 
 Locking devices, 54 
 Lower case letters, 7 
 
 Machine construction, 87 
 
 operations, 87 
 
 screws, 52 
 Malleable iron, 34 
 Material, bill of, 12 
 Materials, 31 
 
 drawing, 1 
 
 for sketching, 99 
 
 piping, 112 
 
 selection of, 35 
 
 weights of, 105 
 Measurements, instruments used for, 
 
 100 
 
 Methods of finish, 85 
 Modulus of elasticity, 37 
 
 table of, 38 
 Multiple threads, 43 
 
 Nasmith, James, 98 
 Nuts, cap, 53 
 
 lock, 54 
 
 standard, 48-50 
 
 Oblique drawing, 135 
 Octagon, to construct, 18 
 Open-hearth process, 34 
 Osborn system, 61 
 
 Parabola, 22 
 
 Patent office drawings, 139 
 Pen, use of ruling, 4 
 Pencils, drawing, 3 
 Picture drawings, 130 
 Pipe, standard, 114 
 Pipe conventional representation, 113 
 dimensions of, 115 
 
 Pipe fittings, 112, 113 
 
 Pipe flanges, dimensions of, 116 
 
 Pipe threads, 114 
 
 Piping, 112 
 
 Piping materials, 112 
 
 Pistons, parts of, 89 
 
 Plane, cutting, 30 
 
 Plane figures, 14 
 
 Planes, cutting, 120 
 
 Planes of projection, 24 
 
 Plunger barrel, weight of, 110 
 
 Prism, development of, 124 
 
 Prisms, intersection of, 118 
 
 Problems, 141 
 
 Projection, exceptions to, 69 
 
 Projections, orthographic, 23 
 
 rules for, 25 
 
 Proportions and forms of letters, 8 
 Proportions of U. S. Standard bolts, 
 
 48-50 
 Pyramid, development of, 126 
 
 Questions, problems and studies, 141 
 
 Representations, surface, 139 
 
 Revolutions, 150 
 
 Ribs, sections of, 75 
 
 Rivet heads, 57 
 
 Riveting, 57, 58 
 
 Rivet spacing, 61 
 
 Rolled steel shapes, 61 
 
 Rounds, 93 
 
 Ruling pen, use of, 4 
 
 Scale, use of, 2 
 Screw, parts of, 41 
 Screws, right and left hand, 41 
 Screw threads, conventional rep- 
 resentation, 44 
 
 forms of, 41 
 
 shading of, 139 
 
 strength of, 46 
 
 uses of, 40 
 Sections, 71 
 
 broken, 72 
 
 conventional, 74
 
 184 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Sections, dotted, 163, 167 
 
 revolved, 72 
 
 rib, 75 
 
 symmetrical parts, 75 
 Sectional views, dotted lines on, 75 
 
 extra, 74 
 
 location of, 72 
 Set screws, 53 
 
 holding power, 53 
 Shade line drawings, 136 
 Shading, line, 137 
 Shafting, dimensioning of, 83 
 
 nominal diameters of, 83 
 Sharpening pencils, 3 
 Show drawings, 68 
 Sketches, diagram, 104 
 Sketches, uses of, 98 
 Sketching, 98 
 
 general rules, 102 
 
 materials for, 99 
 
 procedure in, 100 
 
 taking measurements for, 100 
 Sliding bearings, 90 
 Small parts, dimensioning of, 85 
 Solids, geometrical, 15 
 Split nut and square thread, 44 
 Square thread, 42 
 Standard pipe, 114 
 
 dimensions of, 114 
 Steam engine, parts of, 88 
 Steel, 34 
 
 properties of, 34 
 
 rolled shapes, 61 
 Steel plate connections, 60 
 Strength of screw threads, 46 
 Strength, ultimate, 37 
 Stresses, axial, 35 
 
 unit, 36 
 Studs, 51 
 Stuffing boxes, 92 
 Surfaces, 123 
 Surface shading, 139 
 
 representations, 139 
 Symmetrical parts, sections of, 75 
 System of shading, 137 
 
 Table, depth of tapped holes, 56 
 
 Table, elastic limits, 38 
 
 factors of safety, 39 
 
 moduli of elasticity, 38 
 
 ultimate strength, 38 
 
 U. S. Standard bolts, 55 
 
 U. S. Standard threads, 47 
 Tangent arcs, 18, 19 
 Tangent to an ellipse, 19 
 Tap bolts, 50 
 
 Tapers, dimensioning of, 84 
 Tapped holes, depth of, 56 
 Taps, 51 
 
 Threaded holes, 45, 51 
 Threads, pipe, 114 
 Through bolts, 50 
 Titles, 10 
 Tracing, 65 
 
 Trammel method for ellipse, 20 
 Transition piece, development of, 128 
 Triangle, to construct, 17 
 
 involute of, 21 
 
 use of, 1 
 T square, use of, 1 
 
 Ultimate strength, 37 
 
 table of, 38 
 Unit strain, 37 
 Unit stresses, formula for, 36 
 U. S. Standard bolts, 48 
 U. S. Standard thread, 41 
 
 table, 47 
 
 Views, auxiliary, 28 
 required, 29 
 
 Wear and pressure, 91 
 Weight of cylinder head, 109 
 
 of plunger barrel, 110 
 Weight of materials, method of cal- 
 culation, 107 
 Weights of castings, 106 
 
 of forgings, 111 
 
 of materials, 105 
 White iron, 31 
 Whitworth thread, 42 
 Working drawings, 62 
 Wrought iron, 33 
 
 properties of, 33
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY 
 
 25 PARK PLACE 
 NEW YORK 
 
 SHORT-TITLE CATALOG 
 
 OF 
 
 Publications anfc ^Importations 
 
 OF 
 
 SCIENTIFIC AND ENGINEERING 
 BOOKS 
 
 This list includes 
 
 the technical publications of the following English publishers : 
 SCOTT, GREENWOOD & CO. JAMES MUNRO & CO., Ltd. 
 CONSTABLE&COMPANY,Ltd. TECHNICAL PUBLISHING CO. 
 
 BENN BROTHERS, Ltd. 
 for whoii D. Van Nostrand Company are American agents.
 
 JULY, 1919 
 
 SHORT-TITLE CATALOG 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Publications and Importations 
 
 OF 
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY 
 25 PARK PLACE, N. Y. 
 
 All Trices in this lift are JVET. 
 All bindings are in cloth unless otherwise noted. 
 
 Abbott, A, V. The Electrical Transmission of Energy 8vo, *$s oo 
 
 A Treatise on Fuel. (^Science Series No. 9.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Testing Machines. (Science Series No. 74.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Abraham, Herbert. Asphalts and Allied Substances 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Adam, P. Practical Bookbinding. Trans, by T. E. Maw i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Adams, H. Theory and Practice in Designing 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Adams, H. C. Sewage of Sea Coast Towns 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Adams, J. W. Sewers and Drains for Populous Districts 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Addyman, F. T. Practical X-Ray Work 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Adler, A. A. Theory of Engineering Drawing 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Principles of Parallel Projecting-line Drawing 8vo, *i oo 
 
 Aikman, C. M. Manures and the Principles of Manuring 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Aitken, W. Manual of the Telephone 8vo, *8 oo 
 
 d'Albe, E. E. F.,- Contemporary Chemistry i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Alexander, J. Colloid Chemistry i2ino, i oo 
 
 Alexander, J. H, Elementary Electrical Engineering i2mo, 250 
 
 Allan, W. Strength of Beams Under Transverse Loads. (Science Series 
 
 No. 19.) ,...i6mo, 075 
 
 Theory of Arches. (Science Series No. n.) i6mo, 
 
 Allen, H. Modern Power Gas Producer Practice and Applications. I2mo, *2 50 
 
 Anderson, J. W. Prospector's Handbook iimo, i 50 
 
 Andes, L. Vegetable Fats and Oils 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Animal Fats and Oils. Trans, by C. Salter 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Drying Oils, Boiled Oil, and Solid and Liquid Driers 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Iron Corrosion, Anti-fouling and Anti-coir osive Paints. Trans, by 
 
 Lf., C. Salter 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Oil Colors, and Printers' Ink. Trans, by A. Morris and H. 
 
 Robson 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Treatment of Paper for Special Purposes. Trans, by C. Salter. 
 
 1 2 mo, *3 oo 
 
 Andrews, E. S. Reinforced Concrete Construction i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Theory and Design of Structures 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Further Problems in the Theory and Design of Structures. .. .8vo, *2 50 
 
 The Strength of Materials 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Elastic Stresses in Structures 8vo, g oo 
 
 Andrews, E. S., and Hey wood, H. B. The Calculus for Engineers. i2mo, *2 oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 3 
 
 Annual Reports on the Progress of Chemistry. Twelve Volumes now 
 
 ready. Vol. I., ige/i, Vol. XII., 1914 8vo, each, *z oo 
 
 Argand, M. Imaginary Quantities. Translated from the French by 
 
 A. S. Hardy. (Science Series No. 52.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Armstrong, R., and Idell, P. E. Chimneys for Furnaces and Steam Boilers. 
 
 (Science Series No. i.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Arnold, E. Armature Windings of Direct-Current Dynamos. ,Trans. by 
 
 F. B. DeGress 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Asch, W., and Asch, D. The Silicates in Chemistry and Commerce . 8vo, *6 oo 
 Ashe, S. W., and Keiley, J. D. Electric Railways. Theoretically and 
 
 Practically Treated. Vol. I. Rolling Stock i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Ashe, S. W. Electric Railways. Vol. II. Engineering Preliminaries and 
 
 Direct Current Sub-Stations i2mo; *2 50 
 
 Eleetricity: Experimentally and Practically Applied i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Ashley, R. H. Chemical Calculations i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Atkins, W. Common Battery Telephony Simplified lamo, *i 25 
 
 Atkinson, A. A. Electrical and Magnetic Calculations 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Atkinson, J. J. Friction of Air in Mines. (Science Series No. 14.) . i6mo, o 75 
 Atkinson, J. J., and Williams, Jr., E. H. Gases Met with in Coal Mines. 
 
 (Science Series No. 13.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Atkinson, P. The Elements of Electric Lighting i2mo, i oo 
 
 The Elements of Dynamic Electricity and Magnetism i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Power Transmitted by Electricity i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Auchincloss, W. S. Link and Valve Motions Simplified 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Austin, E. Single Phase Electric Railways 4to, *$ oo 
 
 Austin and Cohn. Pocketbook of Radiotelegraphy (In Press.) 
 
 Ayrton, H. The Electric Arc 8vo, 5 50 
 
 Bacon, F. W. Treatise on the Richards Steam-Engine Indicator . .i2mo, i oo 
 
 Bailey, R. D. The Brewers' Analyst Svo, *5 oo 
 
 Baker, A. L. Quaternions Svo, *i 25 
 
 Thick-Lens Optics tamo, *i 50 
 
 Baker, Benj. Pressure of Earthwork. (Science Series No. 56.)...i6mo l 
 
 Baker, G. S. Ship Form, Resistance and Screw Propulsion Svo, *4 50 
 
 Baker, I. 0. Levelling. (Science Series No. 91.) i6mo, o 75, 
 
 Baker, M. N. Potable Water. (Science Series No. 61.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Sewerage and Sewage Purification. (Science Series No. i8.).i6mo, o 75 
 
 Baker, T. T. Telegraphic Transmission of Photographs i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Bale, G. R. Modern Iron Foundry Practice. i2mo. 
 
 Vol. I. Foundry Equipment, Materials Used *3 oo 
 
 Ball, J. W. Concrete Structures in Railways Svo, *2 50 
 
 Ball, R. S. Popular Guide to the Heavens '. Svo, *5 oo 
 
 Natural Sources of Power. (Westminster Series.) . Svo, *2 oo 
 
 Ball, W. V. Law Affecting Engineers Svo, *3 50 
 
 Bankson, Lloyd. Slide Valve Diagrams. (Science Series No. 108.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 Barham, G. B. Development of the Incandescent Electric Lamp.. Svo, 2 50 
 
 Barker, A. F. Textiles and Their Manufacture. (Westminster Series.) Svo, 2 oo 
 
 Barker, A. F., and Midgley, E. Analysis of Woven Fabrics Svo, 3 50 
 
 Barker, A. H. Graphic Methods of Engine Design i2ino, 2 oo 
 
 Heating and Ventilation 4to, *8 oo
 
 4 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Barnard, J. H. The Naval Militiaman's Guide i6mo, leather i oo 
 
 Barnard, Major J. G. Rotary Motion. (Science Series No. go.)..i6mo, o 75 
 
 Barnes, J. B. Elements of Military Sketching i6mo. *o 75 
 
 Barrus, G. H. Engine Tests 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Barwise, S. The Purification of Sewage I2mo, 3 50 
 
 Baterden, J. R. Timber. (Westminster Series.) 8\o, *2 oo 
 
 Bates, E. L., and Charlesworth, F. Practical Mathematics and 
 
 Geometry i2mo, 
 
 Part I. Preliminary and Elementary Course *i 50 
 
 Part n. Advanced Course .. *i 50 
 
 Practical Mathematics i2mo, * oo 
 
 Practical Geometry and Graphics lamo, oo 
 
 Batey, J. The Science of Works Management izmo, * oo 
 
 Steam Boilers and Combustion i2mo, * oo 
 
 Bayonet Training Manual i6mo, 30 
 
 Beadle, C. Chapters on Papermaking. Five Volumes i2mo, each, * oo 
 
 Beaumont, R. Color in Woven Design 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Finishing of Textile Fabrics 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Standard Cloths 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Beaumont, W. W. The Steam-Engine Indicator 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Bechhold, H. Colloids in Biology and Medicine. Trans, by J. G. 
 
 Bullowa 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Beckwith, A. Pottery 8vo, paper, o 60 
 
 Bedell, F., and Pierce, C. A. Direct and Alternating Current Manual. 
 
 8VO, 2 00 
 
 Beech, F. Dyeing of Cotton Fabrics 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Dyeing of Woolen Fabrics 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Beggs, G. E. Stresses in Railway Girders and Bridges (In Press.} 
 
 Begtrup, J. The Slide Valve 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Bender, C. E. Continuous Bridges. (Science Series No. 26.) . . . . i6mo, o 75 
 
 Proportions of Pins used in Bridges. (Science Series No. 4.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 Bengough, G. D. Brass. (Metallurgy Series.) (In Press.) 
 
 Bennett, H. G. The Manufacture of Leather 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Bernthsen, A. A Text - book of Organic Chemistry. Trans, by G. 
 
 M'Gowan i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Bersch, J. Manufacture of Mineral and Lake Pigments. Trans, by A. C. 
 
 Wright 8vo, 600 
 
 Bertin, L. E. Marine Boilers. Trans, by L. S. Robertson 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Beveridge, J. Papermaker's Pocket Book i2mo, *4 or. 
 
 Binnie, Sir A. Rainfall Reservoirs and Water Supply 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Binns, C. F. Manual of Practical Potting 8vo, A oo 
 
 The Potter's Craft ; i2mo v *2 oo 
 
 Birchmore, W. H. Interpretation of Gas Analysis i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Blaine, R. G. The Calculus and Its Applications i2*no, *i 75 
 
 Blake, W. H. Brewers' Vade Mecum 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Blanchard, W. M. Laboratory Exercises in General Chemistry. .i2mo, i oo 
 Blasdale, W. C. Quantitative Chemical Analysis. (Van Nostrand's 
 
 Textbooks.) i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Bligh, W. G. The Practical Design of Irrigation Works 8vo,
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 5 
 
 Bloch, L. Science of Illumination. Trans, by W. C. Clinton 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Blok, A. Illumination and Artificial Lighting i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Blucher, H. Modern Industrial Chemistry. Trans, by J. P. Millington. 
 
 bvo, *7 50 
 
 Blyth, A. W. Foods: Their Composition and Analysis 8vo, 7 50 
 
 Poisons: Their Effects and Detection 8vo, 8 50 
 
 Bockmann, F. Celluloid i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Bodmer, G. R. Hydraulic Motors and Turbines i2mo, 5 oo 
 
 Boileau, J. T. Traverse Tables 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Bonney, G. E. The Electro-platers' Handbook i2mo, i 50 
 
 Booth, N. Guide to the Ring-spinning Frame i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Booth, W. H. Water Softening and Treatment 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Superheaters and Superheating and Their Control 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Eottcher, A. Cranes: Their Construction, Mechanical Equipment and 
 
 Working. Trans, by A. Tolhausen 4.to, *io oo 
 
 Bottler, M. Modern Bleaching Agents. Trans, by C. Salter. . . .i2ino, *2 50 
 
 Bottone, S. R. Magnetos for Automobilists I2mo, *i oo 
 
 Electro-Motors, How Made and How Use i2mo, i oo 
 
 Boulton, S. B. Preservation of Timber. (Science Series No. 82).i6mo, o 75 
 
 Bourcart, E. Insecticides, Fungicides and Weedkillers 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Bourgougnon, A. Physical Problems. (Science Series No. ii3.).i6mo, o 75 
 Bourry, E. Treatise on Ceramic Industries. Trans, by A. B. Searle. 
 
 8vo (In Press.) 
 
 Bowie, A. J., Jr. A Practical Treatise on Hydraulic Mining 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Bowls, 0. Tables of Common Rocks. (Science Series No. i25.).i6mo, o 75 
 
 Bowser, E. A. Elementary Treatise on Analytic Geometry i2mo, i 75 
 
 Elementary Treatise on the Differential and Integral Calculus . 1 2mo, 2 25 
 
 Elementary Treatise on Analytic Mechanics i2mo, 3 oo 
 
 Elementary Treatise on Hydro-mechanics 121110, 2 50 
 
 A Treatise on Roofs and Bridges i2mo, *2 25 
 
 Boycott, G. W. M. Compressed Air Work and Diving 8vo, *4 25 
 
 Bradford, G Whys and Wherefores of Navigation i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Sea Teims and Phrases i2mo, fabrikoid (In ifccss.) 
 
 Bragg, E. M. Marine Engine Design I2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Design of Marine Engines and Auxiliaries 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Brainard, F. R. The Sextant. (Science Series No. 101.) i6mo, 
 
 Brassey's Naval Annual for 1915. War Edition . ...8vo, & oo 
 
 Briggs, R., and Wolff, A. R. Steam-Heating. (Science Series No. 
 
 68.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Bright, C. The Life Story of Sir Charles Tilso.i Bright 8vo, *4 50 
 
 Telegraphy, Aeronautics and War 8vo, 6 oo 
 
 Brislee, T. J. Introduction to the Study of Fuel. (Outlines of Indus- 
 trial Chemistry.) 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Broadfoot, S. K. Motors: Secondary Batteries. (Installation Manuals 
 
 SeriesJ i2mo, *o 75 
 
 Broughton, H. H. Electric Cranes and Hoists 
 
 Brown, G. Healthy Foundations. (Science Series No. 80.) . . . . i6mo, o 75 
 
 Brown, H. Irrigation 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Brown, H. Rubber 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 W. A. Portland Cement Industry 8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Brown, Wm. N. Dipping, Burnishing, Lacquering and Bronzing 
 
 Brass Ware i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Handbook on Japanning i2mo, *2 oo
 
 6 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Brown, Wm. N. The Art of Enamelling on Metal i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 House Decorating and Painting i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 History of Decorative Art i2mo *o 50 
 
 Workshop Wrinkles 8vo, *i oo 
 
 Browne, C. L. Fitting and Erecting of Engines 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Browne, R. E. Water Meters. (Science Series No. 81) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Bruce, E. M. Detection of Common Food Adulterants i2mo, i 25 
 
 Brunner, R. Manufacture of Lubricants, Shoe Polishes and Leather 
 
 Dressings. Trans, by C. Salter 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Buel, R. H. Safety Valves. (Science Series No. 21.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Bunkley, J. W. Military and Naval Recognition Book i6mo, i oo 
 
 Burley, G. W. Lathes. Their Construction and Operation i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Machine and Fitting Shop Practice i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Testing of Machine Tools lumo, 2 oo 
 
 Burnside, W. Bridge Foundations i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Burstall, F. W. Energy Diagram for Gas. With Text 8vo, i 50 
 
 Diagram. Sold separately *i oo 
 
 Burt, W. A. Key to the Solar Compass i6mo, leather, 2 50 
 
 Buskett, E. W. Fire Assaying i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Butler, H. J Motor Bodies and Chassis 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Byers, H, G,, and Knight, H, G, Notes on Qualitative Analysis 8vc, *i 50 
 
 *. 
 
 Cain, W. Brief Course ir> the Calculus i2mo, *i 75 
 
 Elastic Arches. (Science Series No. 48.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Maximum Stresses. (Science Series No. 38.) i6mo, 075 
 
 . Practical Designing Retaining of Walls. (Science Series No. 3.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 Theory of Steel-concrete Arches and of Vaulted Structures. 
 
 (Science Series No. 42.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Theory of Voussoir Arches. (Science Series No. 12.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Symbolic Algebra. (Science Series No. 73.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Calvert, G. T. The Manufacture of Sulphate of Ammonia and 
 
 Crude Ammonia i2mo, 4 oo 
 
 Carey, A. E., and Oliver, F. W. Tidal Lands 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Carpenter, F. D. Geographical Surveying. (Science Series No. 37.).i6mo, 
 
 Carpenter, R. C., and Diederichs, H. Internal Combustion Engines. . 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Carter, H. A. Ramie (Rhea), China Grass i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Carter, H. R. Modern Flax, Hemp, and Jute Spinning 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Bleaching, Dyeing and Finishing of Fabrics 8vo, *i 25 
 
 Cary, E. R. Solution of Railroad Problems with the Slide Rule . . i6mo, *i oo 
 
 Casler, M. D. Simplified Reinforced Concrete Mathematics i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Cathcart, W. L. Machine Design. Part I. Fastenings 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Cathcart, W. L., and Chaffee, J. I. Elements of Graphic Statics . . .8vo, *3 oo 
 
 ' Short Course in Graphics : i2mo, i 50 
 
 Caven, R. M., and Lander, G. D. Systematic Inorganic Chemistry. i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Chalkley, A. P. Diesel Engines 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Chalmers. T. W. The Production and Treatment of Vegetable Oils, 
 
 4to, 7 50 
 
 Chambers' Mathematical Tables 8vo, i 75 
 
 Chambers, G. F. Astronomy i6mo, *i 50 
 
 Chappel, E. Five Figure Mathematical Tables 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Charnock, Mechanical Technology 3vo, *3 oo 
 
 Charpentier, P. Timber 8vo, :! 6 oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 7 
 
 Chatley, H. Principles and Designs of Aeroplanes. (Science Series 
 
 No. 126.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 How to Use Water Power i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Gyrostatic Balancing 8vo, *i 25 
 
 Child, C. D. Electric Arc 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Christian, M. Disinfection and Disinfectants. Trans, by Chas. 
 
 Salter i2mo, 2 50 
 
 Christie, W. W. Boiler-waters, Scale, Corrosion, Foaming 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Chimney Design and Theory 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Furnace Draft. (Science Series No. 123.) . i6mo, o 75 
 
 Water: Its Purification and Use in the Industries 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Church's Laboratory Guide. Rewritten by Edward Kinch 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Clapham, J. H. Woolen and Worsted Industries 8vo, 2 oo 
 
 Clapperton, G. Practical Papermaking 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Clark, A. G. Motor Car Engineering. 
 
 Vol. I. Construction *4 oo 
 
 Vol. II. Design 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Clark, C. H. Marine Gas Engines. New Edition 2 oo 
 
 Clark, J. M. New System of Laying Out Railway Turnouts i2mo, i oo 
 
 Clarke, J. W., and Scott, W. Plumbing Practice. 
 
 Vol. I. Lead Working and Plumbers' Materials 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Vol. II. Sanitary Plumbing and Fittings (In Press.} 
 
 Vol. in. Practical Lead Working on Roofs (In Press.) 
 
 Clarkson, R. P. Elementary Electrical Engineering (In Press.) 
 
 Clausen-Thue, W. A B C Universal Commercial Telegraphic Code. 
 
 Sixth Edition (In Press.) 
 
 Clerk, D., and Idell, F. E. Theory of the Gas Engine. (Science Series 
 
 No. 62.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Clevenger, S. R. Treatise on the Method of Government Surveying. 
 
 i6mo, morocco, 2 50 
 
 Ciouth, F. Rubber, Gutta-Percha, and Balata 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Cochran, J. Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Specifications 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Treatise on Cement Specifications 8vo, *i oo 
 
 Cocking, W. C. Calculations for Steel-Frame Structures i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Coffin, J. H. C. Navigation and Nautical Astronomy 12:010, 3 oo 
 
 Colburn, Z., and Thurston, R. H. Steam Boiler Explosions. (Science 
 
 Series No. 2.) i5mo, o 75 
 
 Cole, R. S. Treatise on Photographic Optics lamo, i 50 
 
 Coles-Finch, W. Water, Its Origin and Use 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Collins, C. D. Drafting Room Methods, Standards and Forms 8vo, 2 oo 
 
 Collins, J. E. Useful Alloys and Memoranda for Goldsmiths, Jewelers. 
 
 i6mo, I o 50 
 
 Collins, S. Hoare. Plant Products and Chemical Fertilizers 8vo,f| 3 oo 
 
 Collis, A. G. High and Low Tension Switch-Gear Design 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Switchgear. (Installation Manuals Series.) i2mo, *o 50 
 
 Colver, E. D. S. High Explosives 8vo, 12 50 
 
 Comstock, D. F., and Troland, L. T. The Nature of Electricity and 
 
 Matter 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Coombs, H. A. Gear Teeth. (Science Series No. 120.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Cooper, W. R. Primary Batteries 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Copperthwaite, W. C. Tunnel Shields 4to, *g oo 
 
 Corfield, W. H. Dwelling Houses. (Science Series No. 50.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Water and Water-Supply. (Science Series No. 17.) i6mo, o 75
 
 8 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Cornwall, H. B. Manual of Blow-pipe Analysis 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Cowee, G. A. Practical Safety Methods and Devices 8vo, k 3 oo 
 
 Cowell, W. B. Pure Air, Ozone, and Water i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Craig, J. W., and Woodward, W. P. Questions and Answers About 
 
 Electrical Apparatus izmo, leather, i 50 
 
 Craig, T. Motion of a Solid in a Fuel. (Science Series No. 49.) .i6mo, o 75 
 
 Wave and Vortex Motion. (Science Series No. 43.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Cramp, W. Continuous Current Machine Design 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Greedy, F. Single Phase Commutator Motors 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Crehore, A. C. Mystery of Matter and Energy 8vo, i oo 
 
 Crocker, F. B. Electric Lighting. Two Volumes. 8vo. 
 
 Vol. I. The Generating Plant 300 
 
 Vol. II. Distributing Systems and Lamps 
 
 Crocker, F. B., and Arendt, M. Electric Motors 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Crocker, F. B., and Wheeler, S. S. The Management of Electrical Ma- 
 chinery i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Crosby, E. U., Fiske, H. A., and Forster, H. W. Handbook of Fire 
 
 Protection zarno, 4 oo 
 
 Cross, C. F., Bevan, E. J., and Sindall, R. W. Wood Pulp and Its Applica- 
 tions. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Crosskey, L. R. Elementary Perspective 8vo, i 25 
 
 Crosskey, L. R., and Thaw, J. Advanced Perspective 8vo, i 50 
 
 Culley, J. L. Theory of Arches. (Science Series No. 87.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Cushiag, H. C., Jr., and Harrison, N. Central Station Management ... *2 oo 
 
 Dadourian, H. M. Analytical Mechanics I2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Danby, A. Natural Rock Asphalts and Bitumens 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Davenport, C. The Book. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Davey, N. The Gas Turbine 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Davies, F. H. Electric Power and Traction 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Foundations and Machinery Fixing. (Installation Manual Series.) 
 
 i6mo, *i oo 
 
 Deerr, N. Sugar Cane 8vo, 9 oo 
 
 Deite, C. Manual of Soapmaking. Trans, by S. T. King 4to, 
 
 De la Coux, H. The Industrial Uses of Water. Trans, by A. Morris . 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Del Mar, W. A. Electric Power Conductors 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Denny, G. A. Deep-level Mines of the Rand 410, *io oo 
 
 Diamond Drilling for Gold *5 oo 
 
 De Roos, J. D. C. Linkages. (Science Series No. 47.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Derr, W. L. Block Signal Operation Oblong i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Maintenance-of-Way Engineering (In Preparation.) 
 
 Three Hundred Shades and How to Mix Them 8vo, *g oo 
 
 A. Sewer Gases. (Science Series No. 55.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 G. Mill and Factory Wiring. (Installation Manuals Series.) 
 
 i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Dibdin, W. J. Purification of Sewage and Water 8vo, 6 50 
 
 Dichmann, Carl. Basic Open-Hearth Steel Process i2mo, *3 50 
 
 Dieterich, K. Analysis of Resins, Balsams, and Gum Resins 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Dilworth, E. C. Steel Railway Bridges 4to. *4 oo 
 
 Dinger, Lieut. H. C. Care and Operation of Naval Machinery. .. i2mo, *s oo 
 Dixon, D. B. Machinist's and Steam Engineer's Practical Calculator. 
 
 i6mo, morocco, i 25 
 
 Maime 
 Desauit, A. 
 De \flrona, 
 Devey, R. G
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 9 
 
 Dommett, W. E. Motor Car Mechanism i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Dorr, B. F. The Surveyor's Guide and Pocket Table-book. 
 
 i6mo, morocco, 2 oo 
 
 DYaper, <J. H. Elementary Text-book of Light, Heat and Sound . . i2mo, i oo 
 
 Heat and the Principles of Thermo-dynamics izmo, *2 oo 
 
 Draper, E. G. Navigating the Ship i2mo. i 50 
 
 Dron, R. W. Mining Formulas iamo, i oo 
 
 Dubbel, H. High Power Gas Engines 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Dumesny, P., and Noyer, J. Wood Products, Distillates, and Extracts. 
 
 8vo, *5 oo 
 Duncan, W. G., and Penman, D. The Electrical Equipment of Collieries. 
 
 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Dunkley, W. G: Design of Machine Elements. Two volumes. .8vo,each, 2 oo 
 Dunstan, A. E., and Thole, F. B. T. Textbook of Practical Chemistry. 
 
 I2mo, *i 40 
 
 Durham, H. W. Saws 8vo 2 50 
 
 Duthie, A. L. Decorative Glass Processes. (Westminster Series.) .8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Dwight, H. B. Transmission Line Formulas 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Dyke, A. L. Dyke's Automobile and Gasoline Engine Encyclopedia . 8vo, 4 oo 
 
 Dyson, S. S. Practical Testing of Raw Materials 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Dyson, S. S., and Clarkson, S. S. Chemical Works 8vo. *g oo 
 
 Eccles, W. H. Wireless Telegraphy and Telephony i2mo, *8 80 
 
 Eck, J. Light, Radiation and Illumination. Trans, by Paul Hogner, 
 
 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Eddy, H. T. Maximum Stresses under Concentrated Loads 8vo, i 50 
 
 Eddy, L. C. Laboratory Manual of Alternating Currents izmo, o 50 
 
 Edelman, P. Inventions and Patents i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Edgcumbe, K. Industrial Electrical Measuring: Instruments 8vo. 5 oo 
 
 Edler, R. Switches and Switchsear. Trans, by Ph. Laubach. . .8vo *4 oo 
 
 Eissler, M. The Metallurgy of Gold 8vo. 9 oo 
 
 The Metallurgy of Silver 8vo. 4 oo 
 
 The Metallurgy of Argentiferous Lead 8vo, 6 25 
 
 A Handbook on Modern Explosives 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Ekin, T. C. Water Pipe and Sewage Discharge Diagrams folio, *3 oo 
 
 Electric Light Carbons, Manufacture of 8vo, i oo 
 
 Eliot, C. W., and Storer, F. H. Compendious Manual of Qualitative 
 
 Chemical Analysis 12010, *i 25 
 
 Ellis, C. Hydrogenation of Oils 8vo, 7 50 
 
 Ultraviolet Light, Its Applications in Chemical Arts i2mo, 
 
 (In Press) 
 
 Ellis, G. Modern Technical Drawing 8vo, *z oo 
 
 Ennis, Wm. D. Linseed Oil and Other Seed Oils 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Applied Thermodynamics 8vo, *4 50 
 
 Flying Machines To-day i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Vapors for Heat Engines i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Ennen, W. F. A. Materials Used in Sizing 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Erwin, M. The Universe and the Atom i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Evans, C. A. Macadamized Roads . (In Press.) 
 
 Ewing, A. J. Magnetic Induction in Iron 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Fairchild, J. F. Graphical Compass Conversion Chart and Tables... o 50 
 
 Fairie, J. Notes on Lead Ores. i2mo, *o 50 
 
 Notes on Pottery Clays izmo, *z oo
 
 10 D. V. N NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Fairley, W., and Andre, Geo. J. Ventilation of Coal Mines. (Science 
 
 Series No. 58.) i6mo, 075 
 
 Fairweather, W. C. Foreign and Colonial Patent Laws 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Fanning, J. T. Hydraulic and Water-supply Engineering 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Fay, I. W. The Coal-tar Dyes 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Fernbach, R. L. Glue and Gelatine 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Findlay, A. The Treasures of Coal Tar 12010, 2 oo 
 
 Firth, J. B. Practical Physical Chemistry i2mo, i 25 
 
 Fischer, E. The Preparation of Organic Compounds. Trans, by R. V. 
 
 Stanford i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Fish, J. C. L. Lettering of Working Drawings Oblong 8vo, i oo 
 
 Fisher, H. K. C., and Darby, W. C. Submarine Cable Testing . . . .8vo, *3 50 
 Fleischmann, W. The Book of the Dairy. Trans, by C. M. Aikman. 
 
 8vo, 4 50 
 Fleming, J. A, The Alternate-current Transformer. Two Volumes. 8vo. 
 
 Vol. I. The Induction of Electric Currents *6 50 
 
 Vol, II. The Utilization of Induced Currents 6 50 
 
 Propagation of Electric Currents 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 A Handbook for the Electrical Laboratory and Testing Room. Two 
 
 Volumes 8vo, each, *6 50 
 
 Fleury, P. Preparation and Uses of White Zinc Paints 8vo, *2 75 
 
 Flynn, P. J. Flow of Water. (Science Series No. 84.) i2mo, o 75 
 
 -"- Hydraulic Tables. (Science Series No. 66.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Forgie, J. Shield Tunneling 8vo. (In Press.} 
 
 Foster, H. A. Electrical Engineers' Pocket-book. (Seventh Edition.) 
 
 i2mo, leather, 5 oo 
 
 Engineering Valuation of Public Utilities and Factories 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Handbook of Electrical Cost Data 8vo (In Press.) 
 
 Fowle, F. F. Overhead jTransmission Line Crossings i2mo, *i 50 
 
 The Solution of Alternating Current Problems 8vo (In Press.) 
 
 Fox, W. G. Transition Curves. (Science Series No. no.) . . . .i6mo, o 75 
 Fox, W., and Thomas, C. W. Practical Course in Mechanical Draw- 
 ing i2mo, i 25 
 
 Foye, J. C. Chemical Problems. (Science Series No. 69.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Handbook of Mineralogy. (Science Series No. 86.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Francis, J. B. Lowell Hydraulic Experiments 4to, 15 oo 
 
 Franzen, H. Exercises in Gas Analysis 12010, *i oo 
 
 Freudemacher, P. W. Electrical Mining Installations. (Installation 
 
 Manuals Series.) i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Friend, J. N. The Chemistry of Linseed Oil i2mo, i oo 
 
 Frith, J. Alternating Current Design 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Fritsch, J. Manufacture of Chemical Manures. Trans, by D. Grant. 
 
 8vo, *s o 
 
 Frye, A. I. Civil Engineers' Pocket-book i2mo, leather, *$ oo 
 
 Fuller, G. W. Investigations into the Purification of the Ohio River. 
 
 4to, *io oo 
 
 Furnell, J. Paints, Colors, Oils, and Varnishes 8vo. 
 
 Gairdner, J. W. I. Earthwork 8vo (In Press.) 
 
 Gant, L. W. Elements of Electric Traction 8vo, *2 50
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAKD CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG n 
 
 Garcia, A. J. R. V. Spanish-English Railway Terms 8vo, *4 50 
 
 Gardner. H. A. Paint Researches, and Their Practical Applications, 
 
 8vo, *5 oo 
 Garforth, W. E. Rules for Recovering Coal Mines after Explosions and 
 
 Fires i2mo, leather, i 50 
 
 Garrard, C. C Electric Switch and Controlling Gear 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Gaudard, J. Foundations. (Science Series No. 34.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Gear, H. B., and Williams, P. F. Electric Central Station Distribution 
 
 Systems 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Geerligs, H. C. P. Cane Sugar and Its Manufacture 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Chemical Control in Cane Sugar Factories 4to, 500 
 
 Geikie, J. Structural and Field Geology 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Mountains. Their Growth, Origin and Decay 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 The Antiquity of Man in Europe 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Georgi, F., and Schubert, A. Sheet Metal Working. Trans, by C. 
 
 Salter 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Gerhard, W. P. Sanitation, Watersupply and Sewage Disposal of Country 
 
 Houses i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Gas Lighting. (Science Series No. in.) i6mo, 075 
 
 Household Wastes. (Science Series No. 97.) i6mo, 075 
 
 House Drainage. (Science Series No. ,63.) i6mo, 075 
 
 Sanitary Drainage of Buildings. (Science Series No. 93.)..i6mo, o 75 
 
 Gerhardi, C. W. H. Electricity Meters.. 8vo, *7 20 
 
 Geschwind, L. Manufacture of Alum and Sulphates. Trans, by C. 
 
 Salter 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Gibbings, A. H. Oil Fuel Equipment for Locomotives 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Gibbs, W, E. Lighting by Acetylene I2mo, *i 50 
 
 Gibson, A. H. Hydraulics and Its Application 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Water Hammer in Hydraulic Pipe Lines I2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Gibson, A. H., and Ritchie, E. G. Circular Arc Bow Girder 4to, *3 50 
 
 Gilbreth, F. B. Motion Study I2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Primer of Scientific Management izmo, *i oo 
 
 Gillmore, Gen. Q. A. Roads, Streets, and Pavements i2mo, i 25 
 
 Godfrey, E. Tables for Structural Engineers i6mo, leather, *2 50 
 
 Golding, H. A. The Theta-Phi Diagram i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Goldschmidt, R. Alternating Current Commutator Motor 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Goodchild, W Precious Stones. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *2 00 
 
 Goodell, J. M. The Location, Construction and Maintenance of 
 
 Roads 8vo, 150 
 
 Goodeve, T. M. Textbook on the Steam-engine I2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Gore, G. Electrolytic Separation of Metals. . . . . 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Gould, E S. Arithmetic of the Steam-engine i2mo, i oo 
 
 Calculus. (Science Series No. 112.) i6mo, 075 
 
 High Masonry Dams. (Science Series No. 22.) i6mo, 075 
 
 Gould, E- S. Practical Hydrostatics and Hydrostatic Formulas. (Science 
 
 Series No. 117.) i6mo, o 75
 
 12 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Gratacap, L. P. A Popular Guide to Minerals 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Gray, J. Electrical Influence Machines i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Marine Boiler Design 1 2mo, *i 25 
 
 Greenhill, G. Dynamics of Mechanical Flight 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Gregorius, R. Mineral Waxes. Trans, by C. Salter zamo, *3 oo 
 
 Grierson, R. Some Modern Methods of Ventilation 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Griffiths, A. B. A Treatise on Manures I2mo, 3 oo 
 
 Dental Metallurgy 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Gross, E. Hops 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Grossman, J. Ammonia and Its Compounds i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Groth, L. A. Welding and Cutting Metals by Gases or Electricity. 
 
 (Westminster Series) 8vo, *a oo 
 
 Grover, F. Modern Gas and Oil Engines 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Gruner, A. Power-loom Weaving 8vo, *3 5 
 
 Grunsky, C. E. Topographic Stadia Surveying i6mo, 2 oo 
 
 Guldner, Hugo. Internal Combustion Engines. Trans, by H. Diederichs. 
 
 4 to, *is oo 
 
 Gunther, C. 0. Integration 8vo, *i 25 
 
 Garden, R. L. Traverse Tables folio, half morocco, *7 50 
 
 Guy, A. E. Experiments on the Flexure of Beams 8vo, *i 25 
 
 Haenig, A. Emery and Emery Industry 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Hainbach, R. Pottery Decoration. Trans, by C. Salter i2mo, *3 50 
 
 Hale, W. J. Calculations of General Chemistry i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Hall, C. H. Chemistry of Paints and Paint Vehicles i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Hall, G. L. Elementary Theory of Alternate Current Working. .. .8vo, 
 
 Hall, R. H. Governors and Governing Mechanism i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Hall, W. S. Elements of the Differential and Integral Calculus 8vo, *2 25 
 
 Descriptive Geometry 8vo volume and a 4to atlas, *3 50 
 
 Haller, G, F., and Cunningham, E. T. The Tesla Coil i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Halsey, F. A. Slide Valve Gears I2mo, i 50 
 
 The Use of the Slide Rules. (Science Series No. 114.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Worm and Spiral Gearing. (Science Series No. 116.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Hancock, H. Textbook of Mechanics and Hydrostatics 8vo, i 50 
 
 Hancock, W. C. Refractory Materials. (Metallurgy Series.) (In Press.) 
 
 Hardy, E. Elementary Principles of Graphic Statics i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Haring, H. Engineering Law. 
 
 Vol. I. Law of Contract 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Harper, J. H. Hydraulic Tables on the Flow of Water i6mo, *2 oo 
 
 Harris, S. M. Practical Topographical Surveying (In Press.} 
 
 Harrison, W. B. The Mechanics' Tool-book I2mo, i 50 
 
 Hart, J. W. External Plumbing Work 8vo, *3 50 
 
 .Hints to Plumbers on Joint Wiping 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Principles of Hot Water Supply 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Sanitary Plumbing and Draininge 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Haskins, C. H. The Galvanometer and Its Uses i6mo, i 50 
 
 Hatt, J. A. H. The Colorist square ramo, *i 50 
 
 Hausbrand, E. Drying by Means of Air and Steam. Trans, by A. C. 
 
 Wright i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Evaporating, Condensing and Cooling Apparatus. Trans, by A. C. 
 
 Wright Svo, *6 oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 13 
 
 Hausmann, E. Telegraph Engineering 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Hausner, A. Manufacture of Preserved Foods and Sweetmeats. Trans. 
 
 by A. Morris and H. Robson 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Hawkesworth, J. Graphical Handbook for Reinforced Concrete Design. 
 
 410, *2 50 
 
 Hay, A. Continuous Current Engineering 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Hayes, H. V. Public Utilities, Their Cost New and Depreciation. . .8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Public Utilities, Their Fair Present Value and Return 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Heath, F. H. Chemistry of Photography 8vo. (In Press.) 
 
 Heather, H. J. S. Electrical Engineering 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Heaviside, O. Electromagnetic Theory. Vols. I and II... . .8vo, each, * 6 
 
 Vol. Ill 8vo, *i.o oo 
 
 Heck, R. C. H. The Steam Engine and Turbine 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Steam-Engine and Other Steam Motors. Two Volumes. 
 
 Vol. I. 1 hermodynamics and the Mechanics 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Vol. II. Form, Construction, and Working 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Notes on Elementary Kinematics 8vo, boards, *i oo 
 
 Graphics of Machine Forces 8vo, boards, *i oo. 
 
 Heermann, P. Dyers' Materials. Trans, by .A C. Wright i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Hellot, Macquer and D'Apligny. Art of Dyeing Wool, Silk and Cotton. 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Henrici, O. Skeleton Structures 8vo, i 50 
 
 Bering, C^ and Getman, F. H. Standard Tables of Electro-Chemical 
 
 Equivalents i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Bering, D. W. Essentials of Physics for College Students 8vo, *i 75 
 
 Hering-Shaw, A. Domestic Sanitation and Plumbing. Two Vols. . . 8vo, *s oo 
 
 Hering-Shaw, A. Elementary Scienca 8vo, *a oo 
 
 Herington, C. F. Powdered Coal as Fuel 8vo, 300 
 
 Herrmann, G. The Graphical Statics of Mechanism. Trans, by A. P. 
 
 Smith i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Herzfeld, J. Testing of Yarns and Textile Fabrics 8vo. 
 
 (New Edition in Preparation.) 
 
 Hildebrandt, A. Airships, Past and Present 8vo, 
 
 Hildenbrand, B. W. Cable-Making. (Science Series No. 32). .. .i6mo, o 75 
 
 Hilditch, T. P. A Concise History of Chemistry i2mo, *x 50 
 
 Hill, J. W. The Purification of Public Water Supplies. New Edition. 
 
 (In Press.} 
 
 Interpretation of Water Analysis (In Press.) 
 
 Hill, M. J. M. The Theory of Proportion 8vo, *z 50 
 
 Eillhouse, P. A. Ship Stability and Trim 8vo, 4 50 
 
 Hiroi, I. Plate Girder Construction. (Science Series No. g5.)..T6mc, o 75 
 
 Statically -Indeterminate Stresses i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Hirshfeld, C. F. Engineering Thermodynamics. (Science Series No. 45.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 Hoar, A. The Submarine Torpedo Boat i2mo, *z oo 
 
 Hobart, H. M. Heavy Electrical Engineering 8vo, 4 50 
 
 Design of Static Transformers i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Electricity 8vo, 2 oo 
 
 Electric Trains 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Electric Propulsion of Ships 8vo, 2 50
 
 14 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Hobart, J. F. Hard Soldering, Soft Soldering and Brazing izmo, *i oo 
 
 Hobbs, W. R. P. The Arithmetic of Electrical Measurements. .. .i2mo, o 75 
 
 Hoff, J. N. Paint and Varnish Facts and Formulas 12010, *i 50 
 
 Halt, W. The Distribution of Gas 8vo, *8 50 
 
 Holley, A. L. Railway Practice folio, 6 oo 
 
 Hopkins, N. M. Model Engines and Small Boats i2mo, i 25 
 
 Hopkinson, J., Shoolbred, J. N., and Day, R. E. Dynamic Electricity. 
 
 (Science Series No. 71.) iGmo, o 75 
 
 Homer, J. Practical Ironfounding 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Gear Cutting, in Theory and Practice 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Horniman, Roy. How to Make the Railways Pay For the War. . . .8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Houghton, C. E. The Elements of Mechanics of Materials i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Hou&toun, R. A. Studies in Light Production i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Hovenden, F. Practical Mathematics for Young Engineers i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Howe, G. Mathematics for the Practical Man i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Howorth, J. Repairing and Riveting Glass, China and Earthenware. 
 
 8vo, paper, *o 50 
 
 Hoyt, W. E. Chemistry by Experimentation 8vo, *o 70 
 
 Hubbard, E. The Utilization of Wood-waste 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Hiibner, J. Bleaching and Dyeing of Vegetable and Fibrous Materials. 
 
 (Outlines of Industrial Chemistry.) 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Hudson, 0. F. Iron and Steel. (Outlines of Industrial Chemistry. ).8vo, *2 oo 
 Humphrey, J. C. W. Metallography of Strain. (Metallurgy Series.) 
 
 (In Press.) 
 
 Humphreys, A. C. The Business Features of Engineering Practice.. 8vo. *i 25 
 
 Hunter, A. Bridge Work 8vo. (In Press.) 
 
 Hurst, G. H. Handbook of the Theory of Color 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Dictionary of Chemicals and Raw Products ..8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Lubricating Oils, Fats and Greases 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Soaps 8vo, *6 o 
 
 Hurst, G. H., and Simmons, W. H. Textile Soaps and Oils 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Hurst, H. E., and Lattey, R. T. Text-book of Physics 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Also published in three parts. 
 
 Part I. Dynamics and Heat *i 25 
 
 Part II. Sound and Light *i 25 
 
 Part III. Magnetism and Electricity *i 50 
 
 Hutchinson, R. W., Jr. Long Distance Electric Power Transmission. 
 
 i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Hutchinson, R. W., Jr., and Thomas, W. A. Electricity in Mining. i2m, 
 
 (In Press.) 
 Hutchinson, W. B. Patents and How to Make Money Out of Them. 
 
 i2mo, i oo 
 
 Button, W. S. The Works' Manager's Handbook 8vo, 6 oo 
 
 Hyde, E. W. Skew Arches. (Science Series No. 15.) iGmo, o 75 
 
 Hyde, F. S. Solvents, Oils, Gums, Waxes 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Induction Coils. (Science Series No. 53.) i6mo, 075 
 
 Ingham, A. E. Gearing. A practical treatise 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Ingle, H. Manual of Agricultural Chemistry 8vo (In Press.)
 
 D VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 15 
 
 Inness, C. H. Problems in Machine Design izmo, *3 oo 
 
 Air Compressors and Blowing Engines I2mo, 
 
 Centrifugal Pumps izmo, *$ oo 
 
 The Fan i2mo, *4 oo 
 
 Jacob, A., and Gould, E. S. On the Designing and Construction of 
 
 Storage Reservoirs. (Science Series No. 6.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Jannettaz, E. Guide to the Determination of Rocks. Trans, by G. W. 
 
 Plympton iimo, I 50 
 
 Jehl, F. Manufacture of Carbons 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Jennings, A. S. Commercial Paints and Painting. (Westminster Series.) 
 
 . 8vo, *4 oo 
 Jennison, F. H. The Manufacture of Lake Pigments. .8vo (/ Press.) 
 
 Jepson, G. Cams and the Principles of their Construction 8vo, *i 59 
 
 Mechanical Drawing 8vo (In Preparation.) 
 
 Jervis-Smith, F. J. Dynamometers 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Jockin, W. Arithmetic of the Gold and Silversmith i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Johnson, J. H. Are Lamps and Accessory Apparatus. (Installation 
 
 Manuals Series.) i2mo, *o 75 
 
 Johnson, T. M. Ship Wiring and Fitting. (Installation Manuals Series.) 
 
 i2mo, *o 75 
 
 Johnson, W. McA. The Metallurgy of Nickel (In Preparation.) 
 
 Johnston, J. F. W., and Cameron, C. Elements of Agricultural Chemistry 
 
 and Geology 12010, 2 60 
 
 Joly, J. Radioactivity and Geology i2mo, ^3 oo 
 
 Jones, H. C. Electrical Nature of Matter and Radioactivity i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Nature of Solution 8vo, *3 50 
 
 New Era in Chemistry lamo, *2 oo 
 
 Jones, J. H. Tinplate Industry 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Jones, M. W. Testing Raw Materials Used in Paint i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Jordan, L. C. Practical Railway Spiral 12 mo, leather, *i 50 
 
 Joynson, F. H. Designing and Construction of Machine Gearing . .8vo, 2 oo 
 
 Juptner, H. F. V. Siderclogy: The Science of Iron 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Kapp, G. Alternate Current Machinery. (Science Series No. 96.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 Kapper, F. Overhead Transmission Lines 4to, ""4 oo 
 
 Keim, A. W. Prevention of Dampness in Buildings 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Keller, S. S. Mathematics for Engineering Students. i2mo, half leather. 
 
 and Knox, W. E. Analytical Geometry and Calculus *2 oo 
 
 Kelsey, W. R. Continuous-current Dyaamos and Motors 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Kemble, W. T., and Underbill, C. R. The Periodic Law and the Hydrogen 
 
 Spectrum 8vo, paper, *o 50 
 
 Kemp, J. F. Handbook of Rocks 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Kennedy, A. B. W., and Thurston, R. H. Kinematics of Machinery. 
 
 (Science Series No. 54. ) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Kennedy, A. B. W., Unwin, W. C., and Idell, F. E. Compressed Air. 
 
 (Science Series No. 106.) i6mo, o 75
 
 16 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Kennedy, R. Electrical Installations. Five Volumes 4to, 1500 
 
 Single Volumes each, 3 50 
 
 Flying Machines; Practice and Design i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Principles of Aeroplane Construction 8vo, * oo 
 
 Kennelly, A. E. Electro-dynamic Machinery 8vo, 50 
 
 Kent, W. Strenth of Materials. (Science Series No. 41.) i6mo, 75 
 
 Kershaw, J. B. C. Fuel, Water and Gas Analysis 8vo, * 50 
 
 Electrometallurgy. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, * oo 
 
 The Electric Furnace in Iron and Steel Production i2mo, 
 
 Electro- Thermal Methods of Iron and Steel Production 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Kinzbrunner, C. Alternate Current Windings 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Continuous Current Armatures 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Testing of Alternating Current Machines 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Kinzer, H., and Walter, K. Theory and Practice of Damask Weaving, 
 
 8vo, 4 oo 
 Kirkaldy, A.. W., and Evans, A. D. History and Economics of 
 
 Transport 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Kirkaldy, W. G. David Kirkaldy's System of Mechanical Testing . . 4to, 10 oo 
 
 Kirkbride, J. Engraving for Illustration 8vo, *i oo 
 
 Kirk wood, J. P. Filtration of River Waters 4to, 7 50 
 
 Kirschke, A. Gas and Oil Engines i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Klein, JU F Design of a High-speed Steam-engine 8vo, *s oo 
 
 Physical Significance of Entropy 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Klingenberg, G. Large Electric Power Stations 4to, *$ oo 
 
 Knight, R.-Adm. A. M. Modern Seamanship 8vo, *6 50 
 
 Pocket Edition i2mo, f abrikoid, 3 oo 
 
 Knott, C. G., and Mackay, J. S. Practical Mathematics 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Knox, G. D. Spirit of the Soil i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Knox, J. Physico-Chemical Calculations i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Fixation of Atmospheric Nitrogen. (Chemical Monographs.) .12010, *i oo 
 
 Koester, F. Steam-Electric Power Plants 4to, *s oo 
 
 Hydroelectric Developments and Engineering 4to, *5 oo 
 
 Koller, T. The Utilization of Waste Products 8vo, *s oo 
 
 Cosmetics 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Koppe, S. W. Glycerine lamo, *3 50 
 
 Kozmin, P. A. Flour Milling. Trans, by M. Falkner 8vo, 7 50 
 
 Kremann, R. Application of the Physico-Chemical Theory to Tech- 
 nical Processes and Manufacturing Methods. Trans, by H. 
 
 E. Potts 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Kretchmar, K. Yarn and Warp Sizing 8vo, *s oo 
 
 Laffargue, A. Attack in Trench Warfare i6mo, o 50 
 
 Lallier, E. V. Elementary Manual of the Steam Engine i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Lambert, T. Lead and Its Compounds 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Bone Products and Manures 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Lamborn, L. L. Cottonseed Products 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Modern Soaps, Candles, and Glycerin 8vo, *7 50 
 
 Lamprecht, R. Recovery Wo.k After Pit Fires. Trans, by C. Salter, 
 
 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Lancaster, M. Electric Cooking, Heating and Cleaning 8vo, *i oo 
 
 Lanchester, F. W. Aerial Flight. Two Volumes. 8vo. 
 
 Vol. I. Aerodynamics *6 oo 
 
 Vol. II. Aerodonetics . *6 oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 17 
 
 Lanchester, F. W. The Flying Machine 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Industrial Engineering: Present and Post-War Outlook ... i zmo, i oo 
 
 Lange, K. R. By-Products of Coal-Gas Manufacture i2mo, 2 50 
 
 Lamer, E. T. Principles of Alternating Currents lamo. *i 25 
 
 La Rue, B. F. Swing Bridges. (Science Series No. 107.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Lassar-Cohn. Dr. Modern Scientific Chemistry. Trans, by M. M. 
 
 Pattison Muir i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Latimer, L. H., Field, C. J., and Howell, J. W. Incandescent Electric 
 
 Lighting. (Science Series No. 57.) i6mo, o 77, 
 
 Latta, M. N. Handbook of American Gas-Engineering Practice . . .8vo, *4 50 
 
 American Producer Gas Practice 4to, *6 oo 
 
 Laws, B. C. Stability and Equilibrium of Floating Bodies 8vo, *$ 50 
 
 Lawson, W. R. British Railways. A Financial and Commercial 
 
 Survey 8vo, 2 oo 
 
 Leask, A. R. Breakdowns at Sea i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Refrigerating Machinery 12010, 2 oo 
 
 Lecky, S. T. S. "Wrinkles" in Practical Navigation 8vo, 10 oo 
 
 Pocket Edition i2mo, 5 oo 
 
 Danger Angle i6mo, 2 50 
 
 Le Doux, M. Ice-Making Machines. (Science Series No. 46.).i6mo, o 75 
 
 Leeds, C. C. Mechanical Drawing for Trade Schools oblong 4to, *2 oo 
 
 Mechanical Drawing for High and Vocational Schools 4to, *i 25 
 
 Lefevre, L. Architectural Pottery. Trans, by H. K. Bird and W. M. 
 
 Binns 4to, *7 oo 
 
 Lehner, S. Ink Manufacture. Trans, by A. Morris and H. Robson.Svo, *2 50 
 
 Lemstrom, S. Electricity in Agriculture and Horticulture 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Letts, E. A. Fundamental Problems in Chemistry 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Le Van, W. B. Steam-Engine Indicator. (Science Series No. 78).i6mo, o 75 
 
 Lewes, V. B. Liquid and Gaseous Fuels. (Westminster Series.) . .8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Carbonization of Coal 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Lewis, L. P. Railway Signal Engineering 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Lewis Automatic Machine Rifle; Operation of i6mo, *o 60 
 
 Licks, H, E. Recreations in Mathematics i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Lieber, B. F. Lieber's Five Letter American Telegraphic Code .8vo, *is oo 
 
 Spanish Edition 8vo, *is oo 
 
 French Edition 8vo, *is oo 
 
 Terminal Index 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Lieber's Appendix folio, *is oo 
 
 Handy Tables 4to, *2 50 
 
 Bankers and Stockbrokers' Code and Merchants and Shippers' 
 
 Blank Tables 8vo, *i$ oo 
 
 100,000,000 Combination Code 8vo, *io oo 
 
 Engineering Code 8vo, *i2 50 
 
 Livermore, V. P., and Williams, J. How to Become a Competent Motor- 
 man i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Livingstone, R. Design and Constrmction of Commutators 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Mechanical Design and Construction of Generators 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Lloyd, S. L. Fertilizer Materials i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Lobben, P. Machinists' and Draftsmen's Handbook 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Lockwood, T. D. Electricity, Magnetism, and Electro-telegraph ....8vo, 250 
 Electrical Measurement and the Galvanometer i2mo, o 75
 
 18 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Lodge, O. J. Elementary Mechanics .-, i2mo, i 50 
 
 Signalling Across Space without Wires 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Loewenstein, L. C., and Crissey, C. P. Centrifugal Pumps *4 50 
 
 Lomax, J. W. Cotton Spinning i2mo, i 50 
 
 Lord, R. T. Decorative and Fancy Fabrics Svo, *3 50 
 
 Loring, A. E. A Handbook of the Electromagnetic Telegraph . 
 
 (Science Series No. 39.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Low, D. A. Applied Mechanics (Elementary) i6mo, o 80 
 
 Lubschez, B. J. Perspective I2mo, *i 50 
 
 Lucke, C. E. Gas Engine Design Svo, *3 oo 
 
 Power Plants: Design, Efficiency, and Power Costs. 2 vols. 
 
 (In Preparation.) 
 
 Luckiesh, M. Color and Its Application Svo, *s oo 
 
 Light and Shade and Their Applications Svo, *2 50 
 
 Lunge, G. Coal-tar and Ammonia. Three Volumes Sve, *25 oo 
 
 . Technical Gas Analysis Svo, *4 50 
 
 Manufacture of Sulphuric Acid and Alkali. Four Volumes .... Svo, 
 
 Vol. I. Sulphuric Acid. In three parts *i8 oo 
 
 Vol. I. Supplement Svo, 5 oo 
 
 Vol. II. Salt Cake, Hydrochloric Acid and Leblanc Soda. In two 
 
 par: 1 ? (In Press.) 
 
 Vol. Ill Ammonia Soda (In Press.) 
 
 Vol. IV Electrolytic Methods '(In Press.) 
 
 Technical Chemists' Handbook i2mo, leather, *4 oo 
 
 Technical Methods of Chemical Analysis. Trans, by C. A. Keane 
 
 in collaboration with the corps of specialists. 
 
 Vol. I. In two parts Svo, *is oo 
 
 Vol. II. In two parts Svo, *i8 oo 
 
 Vol. III. In two parts Svo, *i8 oo 
 
 The set (3 vols.) complete *5o oo 
 
 Luquer, L. M. Minerals in Rock Sections Svo, *i 50 
 
 MacBride, J. D. A Handbook of Practical Shipbuilding, 
 
 i2mo, fabrikoid, 2 oo 
 
 Macewen, H. A. Food Inspection Svo, *z 50 
 
 Mackenzie, N. F. Notes on Irrigation Works Svo, *2 50 
 
 Mackie, J. How to Make a Woolen Mill Pay Svo, *2 oo 
 
 Maguire, Wm. R. Domestic Sanitary Drainage and Plumbing .... Svo, 4 oo 
 
 Malcolm, H. W. Submarine Telegraph Cable 8 50 
 
 Mallet, A. Compound Engines. Trans, by R. R. Buel. (Science Series 
 
 No. 10.) i6mo, 
 
 .Mansfield, A. N. Electro-magnets. (Science Series No. 64.)..i6mo, o 75 
 
 Marks, E. C. R. Construction of Cranes and Lifting Machinery. i2mo, *2 75 
 
 Construction and Working of Pumps i2mo, 
 
 Manufacture of Iron and Steel Tubes i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 . Mechanical Engineering Materials i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Marks, G. C. Hydraulic Power Engineering Svo, 4 50 
 
 Inventions, Patents and Designs i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Marlow, T. G. Drying Machinery and Practice .Svo, *s oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 19 
 
 Marsh, C. F. Concise Treatise on Reinforced Concrete 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Reinforced Concrete Compression Member Diagram. Mounted on 
 
 Cloth Boards *i . 50 
 
 Marsh, C. F., and Dunn, W. Manual of Reinforced Concrete and Con- 
 crete Block Construction i6mo, fabrikoid (In Press.) 
 
 Marshall, W. J., and Sankey, H, R. Gas Engines. (Westminster Series.) 
 
 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Martin, G. Triumphs and Wonders of Modern Chemistry 8vo, *s oo 
 
 Modern Chemistry and Its Wonders 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Martin, N. Properties and Design of Reinforced Concrete i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Martin, W. D. Hints to Engineers i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Massie, W. W., and Underbill, C. R. Wireless Telegraphy and Telephony. 
 
 I2mo, *i oo 
 
 Mathot, R. E. Internal Combustion Engines 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Maurice, W. Electric Blasting Apparatus and Explosives 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Shot Firer's Guide 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Maxwell, F. Sulphitation in White Sugar y.anufacture i2mo, 3 75 
 
 Maxwell, J. C. Matter and Motion. (Science Series No. 36.). 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 Maxwell, W. H., and Brown, J. T. Encyclopedia of Municipal and Sani- 
 tary Engineering 4to, *io oo 
 
 Mayer, A. M. Lecture Notes on Physics 8vo, 2 oo 
 
 Mayer, C., and Slippy, J. C. Telephone Line Construction 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 McCullough, E. Practical Surveying lamo, *2 oo 
 
 Engineering Work in Cities and Towns : 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Reinforced Concrete i2mo, *i 50 
 
 McCullough, R. S. Mechanical Theory of Heat 8vo, 3 50 
 
 McGibbon. W. C. Indicator Diagrams for Marine Engineers 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Marine Engineers' Drawing Book oblong 4to, *z 50 
 
 McGibbon, W. C. Marine Engineers Pocketbook i2mo, *4 50 
 
 Mclntosh, J. G. Technology of Sugar 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Industrial Alcohol 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Manufacture of Varnishes and Kindred Industries. Three Volumes. 
 
 8vo. 
 
 Vol. I. Oil Crushing, Refining and Boiling 
 
 Vol. II. Varnish Materials and Oil Varnish Making *5 oo 
 
 Vol.. III. Spirit Varnishes and Materials *6 oo 
 
 McKay, C. W. Fundamental Principles of the Telephone Business. 
 
 8vo. (In Press.) 
 
 McKillop, M., and McKillop, A. D. Efficiency Methods i2mo, i 50 
 
 M-Knight, J. D., and Brown, A. W. Marine Multitubular Boilers.... *2 50 
 McMaster, J. B. Bridge and Tunnel Centres. (Science Series No. 20.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 McMechen, F. L. Tests for Ores, Minerals and Metals i2mo, *i co 
 
 McPherson, J. A. Water-works Distribution 8vo, 2 cc 
 
 ' TQ 'de, A. Modern Gas Works Practice , 8vo, *8 50 
 
 Melick, C. W. Dairy Laboratory Guide i2mo, *i 25 
 
 'Mentor." Self-Instruction for Students in Gas Supply. i2mo. 
 
 Elements ry 2 50 
 
 Advanced 2 50 
 
 Me-ck, E. Chemical Reagents; Their Purity and Tests. Trans, by 
 
 H. E. Schenek 8vo, i oo 
 
 Meriva:e, J. H. Notes and Formulae for Mining Students 12010, i 50 
 
 Merritt, Wm. H. Field Testing for Gold and Silver. .. .i6mo, leatker, 2 oo
 
 20 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Mertens. Tactics and Technique of River Crossings. Translated by 
 
 W. Kruger 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Mierzinski, S. Waterproofing of Fabrics. Trans, by A. Morris and H. 
 
 Robson Svo, *2 50 
 
 Miessner, B. F. Radio Dynamics i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Miller, G. A. Determinants. (Science Series No 105.) i6mo, 
 
 Miller, W. J. Introduction to Historical Geology i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Milroy, M. E. W. Home Lace-making i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Mills, C. N. Elementary Mechanics for Engineers Svo, *i oo 
 
 Mitchell, C. A. Mineral and Aerated Waters Svo, *3 oo 
 
 Mitchell, C. A., and Prideaux, R. M. Fibres Used in Textile and Allied 
 
 Industries Svo, 3 50 
 
 Mitchell, C. F., and G. A. Building Construction and Drawing. i2mo. 
 
 Elementary Course *i 50 
 
 Advanced Course *2 50 
 
 Monckton, C. C. F. Radiotelegraphy. (Westminster Series.) Svo, *2 oo 
 
 Monteverde, R. D. Vest Pocket Glossary of English-Spanish, Spanish- 
 English Technical Terms 64010, leather, *i oo 
 
 Montgomery, J. H. Electric Wiring Specificationc i6mo, *i oo 
 
 Moore, E. C. S New Tables for the Complete Solution of Ganguillet and 
 
 Kttter's Formula Svo, *6 oo 
 
 Moore, Harold. Liquid Fuel for Internal Combustion Engines. .. Svo, 5 oo 
 Morecroft, J. H., and Hehre, F. W. Short Course in Electrical Testing. 
 
 Svo, *i 50 
 
 Morgan, A. P. Wireless Telegraph Apparatus for Amateurs i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Moses, A. J. The Characters of Crystals Svo, *2 oo 
 
 and Parsons, C. L. Elements of Mineralogy Svo, *3 50 
 
 Moss, S. A. Elements of Gas Engine Design. (Science Series No. 
 
 121.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 --The Lay-out of Corliss Valve Gears. (Science Series No. 119.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 Mulford, A. C. Boundaries and Landmarks i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Mullin, J. P. Modern Moulding and Pattern-making i2mo, 2 50 
 
 Munby, A. E. Chemistry and Physics of Building Materials. (West- 
 minster Series.) STO, *2 oo 
 
 Murphy, J. G. Practical Mining i6mo, i oo 
 
 Murray, J. A. Soils and Manures. (Westminster Series.) Svo, *2 oo 
 
 Nasmith, J. The Student's Cotton Spinning. Svo, 4 50 
 
 Recent Cotton Mill Construction i2mo, 2 50 
 
 Neave, G. B., and Heilbron, I. M. Identification of Organic Compounds. 
 
 i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Neilson, R. M. Aeroplane Patents Svo, *2 oo 
 
 Nerz, F. Searchlights. Trans, by C. Rodgers Svo, *3 oo 
 
 Neuberger, H., and Noalhat, H. Technology of Petroleum. Trans, by 
 
 J. G. Mclntosh Svo, *io oo 
 
 Newall, J. W. Drawing, Sizing and Cutting Bevel-gears Svo, i 50 
 
 Newbigin, M. I., and Flett, J. S. James Geikie, the Man and the 
 
 Geologist Svo, 350 
 
 Newbeging, T. Handbook for Gas Engineers and Managers Svo, *6 50 
 
 Newell, F. K., and Drayer, C. E. Engineering as a Career. .i2mo, cloth, *! oo 
 
 paper, o 75 
 
 Nicol, G. Ship Construction and Calculations Svo, *io oo 
 
 Nipher, F. E. Theory of Magnetic Measurements I2mo, i oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 21 
 
 Nisbet, H. Grammar of Textile Design 8vo, 7 50 
 
 Nolan, H. The Telescope. (Science Series No. 51.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Norie, J. W. Epitome of Navigation (2 Vols.) octavo, 15 oo 
 
 A Complete Set of Nautical Tables with Explanations of Their 
 
 Use octavo, 6 50 
 
 North, H. B. Laboratory Experiments in General Chemistry zarno, *i oo 
 
 O'Connor, H. The Gas Engineer's Pocketbook . lamo, leather, 3 50 
 
 Ohin, G. S., and Lockwood, T. D. Galvanic Circuit Translated by 
 
 William Francis (Science Series No. 102.) iGmo, o 75 
 
 Olsen, J. C. Text-book of Quantitative Chemical Analysis 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Olsson, A. Motor Control, in Turret Turning and Gun Elevating. (U. S. 
 
 Navy Electrical Series, No. i.) I2mo, paper, *o 50 
 
 Ormsby, M. T. M. Surveying i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Oudin, M. A. Standard Polyphase Apparatus and Systems 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Owen, D. Recent Physical Research 8vo, 
 
 Pakes, W. C. C., and Nankivell, A. T. The Science of Hygiene . .8vo, *i 75 
 
 Palaz, A. Industrial Photometry. Trans, by G. W. Patterson, Jr .. 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Palmer, A. R. Electrical Experiments i2mo, o 75 
 
 Magnetic Measurements and Experiments i2mo, o 75 
 
 Pamely, C. Colliery Manager's Handbook 8vo, *io oo 
 
 Parker, P. A. M. The Control of Water 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Parr, G. D. A. Electrical Engineering Measuring Instruments. .. .8vo, *3 50 
 Parry, E. J, Chemistry of Essential Oils and Artificial Perfumes. 
 
 Foods and Drugs. Two Volumes. 
 
 Vol. I. Monograghs on Essential Oils *9 
 
 Vol. II. Constituents of Essential OUs, Analysis 
 
 and Coste, J. H. Chemistry of Pigments 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Parry, L. Notes on Alloys 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Metalliferous Wastes ' 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Analysis of Ashes and Alloys 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Parry, L. A. Risk and Dangers of Various Occupations 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Parshall, H. F., and Hobart, H. M. Armature Windings 410, *7 50 
 
 Electric Railway Engineering 4to, *7 50 
 
 Parsons, J. L. Land Drainage 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Parsons, S. J Malleable Cast Iron 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Partington, J. R. Higher Mathematics for Chemical Students. .i2mo, *2 oo 
 Textbook of Thermodynamics 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 The Alkali Industry 8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Passmore, A. C. Technical Terms Used in Architecture 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Patchell, W. H. Electric Power in Mines 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Pat erson, G. W. L. Wiring Calculations i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Electric Mine Signalling Installations i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Patterson, D. The Color Printing of Carpet Yarns 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Color Matching on Textiles 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Textile Color Mixing. 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Paulding, C. P, Condensation of Steam in Covered and Bare Pipes 8vo, *2 oo- 
 
 Transmission of Heat through Cold-storage Insulation i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Payne, D. W. Iron Founders' Handbook 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Peddie, R. A. Engineering and Metallurgical Books I2mo, *i 50 
 
 Peirce, B System of Analytic Mechanics 410, 10 oo 
 
 Linnear Associative Algebra 4to, 3 oo 
 
 Pendred, V The Railway Locomotive. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *2 oo
 
 22 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Perkin, F. M. Practical Methods of Inorganic Chemistry izmo, *i oo 
 
 Perrin, J. Atoms 8vo, *2 50 
 
 and Jaggers, E. M. Elementary Chemistry i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Perrine, F. A. C. Conductors for Electrical Distribution 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Petit, G. White Lead and Zinc White Paints 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Petit, R. How to Build an Aeroplane. Trans, by T. O'B. Hubbard, and 
 
 J. H. Ledeboer 8vo, *i 50 
 
 Pettit, Lieut, J. S. Graphic Processes. (Science Series No. 76.) . i6mo, o 75 
 Philbrick, P. H. Beams and Girders. (Science Series No. 88.) . . . i6mo, 
 
 Phillips, J. Gold Assaying 8vo, *3 75 
 
 Dangerous Goods 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Phin, J. Seven Follies of Science 12010, *i 50 
 
 Pickworth, C. N. The Indicator Handbook. Two Volumes. . i2mo, each, i 50 
 
 Logarithms for Beginners '. i2mo. boards, o 50 
 
 The Slide Rule i2mo, i 50 
 
 Pilcher, R. B., and Butler-Jones, F. What Industry Owes to Chemical 
 
 Science i2mo, i 50 
 
 Plattner's Manual of Blow-pipe Analysis. Eighth Edition, revised. Trans. 
 
 by H. B. Cornwall 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Plympton, G. W. The Aneroid Baremeter. (Science Series No. 35.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 How to Become an Engineer. (Science Series No. 100.) . . .i6mo, o 75 
 
 Van Nostrand's Table Book. (Science Series No. 104.) . . . .i6mo, o 75 
 
 Pochet, M. L. Steam Injectors. Translated from the French. (Science 
 
 Series No. 29.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Pocket Logarithms to Four Places. (Science Series No. 65.). ..i6mo., o 75 
 
 leather, i oo 
 
 Polleyn, F. Dressings and Finishings for Textile Fabrics 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Pope, F. G. Organic Chemistry i2mo, 2 50 
 
 Pope, F. L. Modern Practice of the Electric Telegraph 8vo, i 50 
 
 Popplewell, W. C. Prevention of Smoke 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Strength of Materials 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Porritt, B. D. The Chemistry of Rubber. (Chemical Monographs, 
 
 No. 3.) 12010, *i oo 
 
 Porter, J. R. Helicopter Flying Machine i2mo, i 50 
 
 Potts, H. E. Chemistry of the Rubber Industry. (Outlines of Indus- 
 trial Chemistry) 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Practical Compounding of Oils, Tallows and Grease 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Pratt, K. Boiler Draught i2mo, *i 25 
 
 High Speed Steam Engines 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Pray, T., Jr. Twenty Years with the Indicator 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Steam Tables and Engine Constant 8vo, 2 oo 
 
 Prelini, C. Earth and Rock Excavation 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Graphical Determination of Earth Slopes 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Tunneling. New Editiop 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Dredging. A Practical Treatise 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Prescott, A. B. Organic Analysis 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Prescott, A. B., and Johnson, O. C. Qualitative Chemical Analysis. . .8vo, *3 50 
 Prescott, A. B., and Sullivan, E. C. First Book in Qualitative Chemistry. 
 
 i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Prideaux, E. B. R. Problems in Physical Chemistry 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 The Theory and Use of Indicators 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Primrose, G. S. C. Zinc. (Metallurgy Series.) (In Press,")
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 23 
 
 Prince, G. T. Flow of Water i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Prost, E. Manual of Chemical Analysis 8vo, 600 
 
 Pull, E. Modern Steam Boilers 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Pullen, W. W. F. Application of Graphic Methods to the Design of 
 
 Structures i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Injectors: Theory, Construction and Working i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Indicator Diagrams 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Engine Testing .' 8vo, *$ 50 
 
 Putsch, A. Gas and Coal-dust Firing 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Pynchon, T. R. Introduction to Chemical Physics 8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Rafter, G. W. Mechanics of Ventilation. (Science Series No. 33.) .i6mo, o 75 
 
 Potable Water. (Science Series No. 103.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Treatment of Septic Sewage. (Science Series No. n8.).-i6mo, o 75 
 
 Rafter, G. W., and Baker, M. N. Sewage Disposal in the United States. 
 
 4to, *6 oo 
 
 Raikes, H. P. Sewage Disposal Works 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Randau, P. Enamels and Enamelling 8vo, *s oo 
 
 Rankine, W. J. M. Applied Mechanics 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Civil Engineering 8vo, 6 50 
 
 Machinery and Millwork 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 The Steam-engine and Other Prime Movers 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Rankine, W. J. M., and Bamber, E. F. A Mechanical Text-book 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Ransome, W. R. Freshman Mathematics izmo, *i 35 
 
 Raphael, F. C. Localization of Faults in Electric Light and Power Mains. 
 
 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Rasch, E. Electric Arc Phenomena. Trans, by K. Tornberg 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Rathbone, R. L. B. Simple Jewellery 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Rateau, A. Flow of Steam through Nozzles and Orifices. Trans, by H. 
 
 B. Brydon 8vo *i 50 
 
 Rausenberger, F. The Theory of the Recoil Guns 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Rautenstrauch, Wo Notes on the Elements of Machine Design. 8vo, boards, *i 50 
 Rautenstrauch, W., and Williams, J= T. Machine Drafting and Empirical 
 Design. 
 
 Part I. Machine Drafting 8vo, *i 25 
 
 Part II. Empirical Design (In Preparation.) 
 
 Raymond, E. B. Alternating Current Engineering I2mo, *2 50 
 
 Rayner, H. Silk Throwing and Waste Silk Spinning 8vo, 
 
 Recipes for the Color, Paint, Varnish, Oil, Soap and Drysaltery Trades, 
 
 8vo, *s oo 
 
 Recipes for Flint Glass Making 12010, *5 oo 
 
 Redfern, J. B., and Savin, J. Bells, Telephones (Installation Manuals 
 
 Series.) i6mo, *o 50 
 
 Redgrove, H. S. Experimental Mensuration i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Redwood, B. Petroleum. (Science Series No. 92.) i5mo, o 75 
 
 Reed, S. Turbines Applied to Marine Propulsion *5 oo 
 
 Reed's Engineers' Handbook 8vo, *g oo 
 
 Key to the Nineteenth Edition of Reed's Engineers' Handbook. .8vo, 4 oo 
 
 Useful Hints to Sea-going Engineers i2mo, 3 oo 
 
 Reid, E. E. Introduction to Research in Organic Chemistry. (In Press J) 
 Reinhardt, C. W. Lettering for Draftsmen, Engineers, and Students. 
 
 oblong 4to, boards, i oo
 
 2 4 
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Reinhardt, C. W. The Technic of Mechanical Drafting, 
 
 oblong, 4to, boards, *i oo 
 Reiser, F. Hardening and Tempering of Steel. Trans, by A. Morris and 
 
 H. Robson lamo, *2 50 
 
 Reiser, N. Faults in the Manufacture of Woolen Goods. Trans, by A. 
 
 Morris and H. Robson. 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Spinning and Weaving Calculations 8vo, ^500 
 
 Renwick, W. G. Marble and Marble Working 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Reuleaux, F. The Constructor. Trans, by H. H. Suplee 4to, *4 oo 
 
 Rey, Jean. The Range of Electric Searchlight Projectors 8vo, *4 50 
 
 Reynolds, 0., and Idell, F. E. Triple Expansion Engines. (Science 
 
 Series No. 99.) iGrao, o 75 
 
 Rhead, G. F. Simple Structural Woodwork i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Rhead, G. W. British Pottery Marks 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Rhodes, H. J. Art of Lithography 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Rice, J. M., and Johnson, W. W. A New Method of Obtaining the Differ- 
 ential of Functions lamo, o 50 
 
 Richards, W. A. Forging of Iron and Steel i2mo, i 50 
 
 Richards, W. A., and North, H. B. Manual of Cement Testing i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Richardson, J. The Modern Steam Engine 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Richardson, S. S. Magnetism and Electricity i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Rideal, S. Glue and Glue Testing 8vo, *s oo 
 
 Riesenberg, F. The Men on Deck i2mo, 3 oo 
 
 Standard Seamanship for the Merchant Marine. i2mo (In Press.) 
 
 Rimmer, E. J. Boiler Explosions, Collapses and Mishaps 8vo, *i 75 
 
 Rings, F. Reinforced Concrete in Theory and Practice lamo, *4 50 
 
 Reinforced Concrete Bridges 4to, *5 oo 
 
 Ripper, W Course of Instruction in Machine Drawing folio, *6 oo 
 
 Roberts, F. C. Figure of the Earth. (Science Series No. 79.) . . i6mo, o 75 
 
 Roberts, J., Jr. Laboratory Work in Electrical Engineering 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Robertson, L. S. Water-tube Boilers 8vo, 2 oo 
 
 Robinson, J. B. Architectural Composition 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Robinson, S. W. Practical Treatise on the Teeth of Wheels. (Science 
 
 Series No. 24.) i6mo, o ^5 
 
 Railroad Economics. (Science Series No. 59.) 16010, o 75 
 
 Wrought Iron Bridge Members. (Science Series No. 6o.)..i6mo, o 75 
 
 Robson, J. H. Machine Drawing and Sketching 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Roebling, J. A. Long and Short Span Railway Bridges folio, 25 oo 
 
 Rogers, A. A Laboratory Guide of Industrial Chemistry 8vo, 2 oo 
 
 Elements of Industrial Chemistry. i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Manual of Industrial Chemistry 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Rogers, F. Magnetism of Iron Vessels. (Science Series No. 30.) 
 
 iGmo, o 75 
 Rohland, P. Colloidal and Crystalloidal State of Matter. Trans, by 
 
 W. J. Britland and H. E. Potts i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Rollinson, C. Alphabets Oblong, i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Rose, J. The Pattern-makers' Assistant 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Key to Engines and Engine-running I2mo, 2 50 
 
 Rose, T. K. The Precious Metals. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Rosenhain, W. Glass Manufacture. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Physical Metallurgy, An Introduction to. (Metallurgy Series.) 
 
 8vo, * 3 50 
 
 Roth, W. A. Physical Chemistry 8vo, *2 oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 25 
 
 Rowan, F. J. Practical Physics of the Modern Steam-boiler 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 and Idell, F. E. Boiler Incrustation and Corrosion. (Science 
 
 Series No. 27.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Roxburgh, W. General Foundry Practice. (Westminster Series.) .8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Ruhmer, E. Wireless Telephony. Trans, by J. Erskine-Murray. .8vo, *4 50 
 
 Russell, A. Theory of Electric Cables and Networks 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Rust, A. Practical Tables for Navigators and Aviators 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Rutley, F. Elements of Mineralogy i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Sandeman, E. A. Notes on the Manufacture of Earthenware. . .i2mo, 3 50 
 
 Sanford, P. G. Nitro-explosives 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Saunders, C. H. Handbook of Practical Mechanics i6mo, i oo 
 
 leather, i 25 
 
 Sayers, H. M. Brakes for Tram Cars 8vo, *i 25 
 
 Scheele, C. W. Chemical Essays 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Scheithauer, W. Shale Oils and Tars 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Scherer, R. Casein. Trans, by C. Salter 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Schidrowitz, P. Rubber, Its Production and Industrial Uses 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Schindler, K. Iron and Steel Construction Works Tamo, *2 oo 
 
 Schmall, C. N. First Course in Analytic Geometry, Plane and Solid. 
 
 i2mo, half leather, *i 75 
 
 and Shack, S. M. Elements of Plane Geometry i2mo, i 25 
 
 Schmeer, L. Flow of Water 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Schumann, F. A Manual of Heating and Ventilation. .. .i2mo, leather, i 50 
 
 Schwarz, E. H. L. Causal Geology 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Schweizer, V. Distillations of Resins 5vo, 5 oo 
 
 Scott, A. H. Reinforced Concrete in Practice ismo, 2 oo 
 
 Scott, W. W. Qualitative Analysis. A Laboratory Manual. New 
 
 Edition 2 50 
 
 Standard Methods of Chemical Analysis 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Scribner, J. M. Engineers' and Mechanics' Companion. .i6mo, leather, i 50 
 Scudder, H. Electrical Conductivity and lonization Constants of 
 
 Organic Compounds 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Seamanship, Lectures on izmo, 2 oo 
 
 Searle, A. B. Modern Brickmaking 8vo (In Press ) 
 
 Cement, Concrete and Bricks 8vo, *6 50 
 
 Searle, G. M. "Sumners' Method." Condensed and Improved. 
 
 (Science Series No. 124.) i5mo, 075 
 
 Seaton, A. E. Manual of Marine Engineering 8vo 800 
 
 Seaton, A. E., and Rounthwaite, H. M. Pocket-book of Marine Engi- 
 neering i6mo, leather, 5 oo 
 
 Seeligmann, T., Torrilhon, G. L., and Falconnet, H. India Rubber and 
 
 Gutta Percha. Trans, by J. G. Mclntosh 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Seidell, A. Solubilities of Inorganic and Organic Substances. .. .8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Seligman, R. Aluminum. (Metallurgy Series.) (In Press.) 
 
 Sellew, W. H. Steel Rails 4 to, *io oo 
 
 Railway Maintenance Engineering i2mo, *a 50 
 
 Senter. G. Outlines of Physical Chemistry i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Text-book of Inorganic Chemistry i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Sever, G. F. Electric Engineering Experiments 8vo, boards, *i oo 
 
 Sever, G. F., and Townsend, F. Laboratory and Factory Tests in Elec- 
 trical Engineering 8vo, *a 50
 
 26 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Sewall, C. H. Wireless Telegraphy 8vo, *z oo 
 
 Lessons in Telegraphy i2mo, v i oo 
 
 Sewell, T. The Construction of Dynamos 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Sexton, A. H. Fuel and Refractory Materials izmo, *2 50 
 
 . Chemistry of the Materials of Engineering i?.mo, *3 oo 
 
 Alloys (Non-Ferrous) 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Sexton, A. H., and Primrose, J. S. G. The Metallurgy of Iron and Steel. 
 
 8vo, *6 50 
 
 Seymour, A. Modern Printing Inks 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Shaw, Henry S. H. Mechanical Integrators. (Science Series No. 83.) 
 
 i'5mo, o 75 
 
 Shaw, S. History of the Staffordshire Potteries .8vo, 2 50 
 
 Chemistry of Compounds Used in Porcelain Manufacture. .. .8vo, *6 oo 
 
 S4iaw, T. R. Driving of Machine Tools i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Precision Grinding Machines ismo, 5 oo 
 
 Shaw, W. N. Forecasting Weather 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Sheldon, S., and Hausmann, E. Direct Current Machines i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Alternating Current Machines i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Sheldon, S., and Hausmann, E. Electric Traction and Transmission 
 
 Engineering i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Physical Laboratory Experiments, for Engineering Students. .8vo, *i 25 
 
 Sherriff, F. F. Oil Merchants' Manual and Oil Trade Ready Reckoner, 
 
 8y o> 3 50 
 
 Shields, J. E. Notes on Engineering Construction i2mo, i 50 
 
 Shreve, S. H. Strength of Bridges and Roofs 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Shunk, W. F. The Field Engineer i2mo, fabrikoid, 2 50 
 
 Simmons, W. H., and Appleton, H. A. Handbook of Soap Manufacture, 
 
 3/o, *4 co 
 
 Simmons, W. H., and Mitchell, C. A. Edible Fats and Oils Svo, *3 50 
 
 Simpson, G. The Naval Constructor i2mo, fabrikoid, *$ oo 
 
 Simpson, W. Foundations Svo. (In Press,} 
 
 Sinclair, A. Development of the Locomotive Engine. . . Svo, half leather, 5 oo, 
 
 Sindall, R. W. Manufacture of Paper. (Westminster Series.). .. .8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Sindall, R. W., and Bacon, W. N. The Testing of Wood Pulp Svo, *2 50 
 
 Sloane, T. O'C. Elementary Electrical Calculations i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Smallwood, J. C. Mechanical Laboratory Methods. (Van Nostrand's 
 
 Textbooks.) i2mo, fabrikoid, *3 oo 
 
 Smith, C. A. M. Handbook of Testing, MATERIALS Svo, *2 50 
 
 Smith, C. A. M., and Warren, A. G. New Steam Tables Svo, *i 25 
 
 Smith, C. F. Practical Alternating Currents and Testing Svo, *3 50 
 
 Practical Testing of Dynamos and Motors Svo, *3 oo 
 
 Smith, F. E. Handbook of General Ir^tfuciion for Mechanics . . . larro, I 50 
 Smith, G. C. Trinitrotoluenes and Mono- and Dinitrotoluenes, Their 
 
 Manufacture and Properties i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Smith, H. fJ. Minerals and the Microscope i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Smith, T. r. Manufacture o* Paint Svo, *5 oo 
 
 Smith, R. H. Principles of Machine Work i2mo, 
 
 Advanced Machine W<vrV . i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Smith, W. Chemistrv of Hat Manufacturing 121110, *3 50 
 
 Snell, A. T. Flecrric MotiTp Power Svo, *4 oo 
 
 Snow, W. G. Pocketbook of Steam Heatim? and Ventilation. (Tn Press.} 
 Snow, W. G., and Nolan, T. Ventilation of Buildings. (Science Series 
 
 No. ;.> i6mo, o "* 
 
 Soddy, F. Radioactivity Svo, *3 oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 27 
 
 Solomon, M. Electric Lamps. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Somerscales, A. N. Mechanics for Marine Engineers izmo, *2 oo 
 
 Mechanical and Marine Engineering Science 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Sothern, J. W. The Marine Steam Turbine 8/0, *i2 50 
 
 Verbal Notes and Sketches for Marine Engineers Svo, *i2 50 
 
 Sothern, J. W., and Sothern, R. M. Elementary Mathematics for 
 
 Marine Engineers izmo, *i 50 
 
 Simple Problems in Marine Engineering Design lamo, 
 
 Souster, E. G. W. Design of Factory and Industrial Buildings. . .8vo, 4 oo 
 Southcombe, J. E. Chemistry of the Oil Industries (Outlines of In- 
 dustrial Chemistry.) Svo, *3 oo 
 
 Soxhlet, D. H. Dyeing and Staining Marble. Trans, by A. Morris and 
 
 H. Robson Svo, *2 50 
 
 Spangenburg, L. Fatigue of Metals. Translated by S. H. Shreve. 
 
 (Science Series No. 23.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Specht, G. J., Hardy, A. S., McMaster, J. B., and Walling. Topographical 
 
 Surveying. (Science Series No. 72.) xf5mo, o 75 
 
 Spencer, A. S. Design of Steel-Framed Sheds Svo, *3 50 
 
 Speyers, C. L. Text-book of Physical Chemistry Svo, *i 50 
 
 Spiegel, L. Chemical Constitution and Physiological Action. ( Trans. 
 
 by C. Luedeking and A. C. Boylston.) i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Sprague, E. H. Hydraulics 12010, 2 co 
 
 Elements of Graphic Statics Svo, 2 co 
 
 Stability of Masonry iamo, 2 oo 
 
 Elementary Mathematics for Engineers lamo, 2 co 
 
 Stability of Arches i ?.mo, 2 oo 
 
 Strength of Structural Elements i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Moving Loads by Influence Lines and Other Methods iamo, 2 oo 
 
 Stahl, A. W. Transmission of Power. (Science Series No. 28.) . i6mo, 
 
 Stahl, A. W., and Woods, A. T. Elementary Mechanism i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Staley, C., and Pierson, G. S. The Separate System of Sewerage. . .8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Standage, H. C. Leatherworkers' Manual Svo, *3 50 
 
 Sealing Waxes, Wafers, and Other Adhesives Svo, *2 50 
 
 Agglutinants of all Kinds for all Purposes i2mo, *4 50 
 
 Stanley, H. Practical Applied Physics (In Press.) 
 
 Stansbie, J. H. Iron and Steel. (Westminster Series.) Svo, *2 oo 
 
 Steadman, F. M. Unit Photography i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Stecher, G. E. Cork. Its Origin and Industrial Uses i2mo, i oo 
 
 Steinheil, A., and Voit, E. Applied Optics Svo, 500 
 
 Steinman, D. B. Suspension Bridges and Cantilevers. (Science Series 
 
 No. 127. ) 075 
 
 Melan's Steel Arches and Suspension Bridges Svo, *3 oo 
 
 Stevens, E. J. Field Telephones and Telegraphs i 20 
 
 Stevens, H. P. Paper Mill Chemist i6mo (In Press. ) 
 
 Stevens, J. S. Theory of Measurements i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Stevenson, J. L. Blast-Furnace Calculations i2mo, leather, *2 oo 
 
 Stewart, G. Modern Steam Traps i2mo, *i 75 
 
 Stiles, A. Tables for Field Engineers i2mo, i oo 
 
 Stodola, A. Steam Turbines. Trans, by L. C. Loewenstein Svo, *5 oo 
 
 Stone, H. The Timbers of Commerce Svo, 3 50 
 
 Stopes, M. Ancient Plants .Svo, *2 oo 
 
 The Study of Plant Life .Svo, *2 oo 
 
 Sudborough, J. J., and James, T. C. Practical Organic Chemistry. . i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Suf fling, E. R. Treatise on the Art of Glass Painting Svo, *3 50
 
 28 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Sullivan, T. V., and Underwood, N. Testing and Valuation of Build- 
 ing and Engineering Materials (In Press.) 
 
 Sur, F. J. S. Oil Prospecting and Extracting 8vo, *i oo 
 
 Svenson, C. L. Handbook on Piping 8vo, 4 oo 
 
 Essentials of Drafting 8vo, i 50 
 
 Swan, K. Patents, Designs and Trade Marks. (Westminster Series.). 
 
 8vo, *2 oo 
 Swinburne, J., Wordingham, C. H., and Martin, T. C. Electric Currents. 
 
 ( Science Series No. 109.) i6mo, 075 
 
 Swoope, C. W. Lessons in Practical Electricity I2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Tailfer, L. Bleaching Linen and Cotton Yarn and Fabrics Svo, 7 oo 
 
 Tate, J. S. Surcharged and Different Forms of Retaining- walls. (Science 
 
 Series No. 7.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Taylor, F. N. Small Water Supplies i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Masonry in Civil .Engineering Svo, *2 50 
 
 Templeton, W. Practical Mechanic's Workshop Companion. 
 
 i2mo, morocco, 2 oo 
 Tenney, E. H. Test Methods for Steam Power Plants. (Van 
 
 Nostrand's Textbooks.) i2mo, *z 50 
 
 Terry, H. L. India Rubber and its Manufacture. (Westminster Series.) 
 
 Svo, *2 oo 
 Thayer, H. R. Structural Design. Svo. 
 
 Vol. I. Elements of Structural Design *2 oc 
 
 Vol. II. Design of Simple Structures *4 oo 
 
 Vol. III. Design of Advanced Structures (In Preparation.) 
 
 Foundations and Masonry (In Preparation.) 
 
 Thiess, J. B., and Joy, G. A. Toll Telephone Practice Svo, *3 50 
 
 Thorn, C., and Jones, W. H. Telegraphic Connections.. . .oblong, lamo, 150 
 
 Thomas, C. W. Paper-makers' Handbook (In Press.) 
 
 Thomas, J. B. Strength of Ships Svo, ^ 50 
 
 Thomas, Robt. G. Applied Calculus i2mo (In Press.) 
 
 Thompson, A. B. Oil Fields of Russia 4to, *7 50 
 
 Oil Field Development 7 50 
 
 Thompson, S. P. Dynamo Electric Machines. (Science Series No. 75.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 Thompson, W. P. Handbook of Patent Law of All Countries i6mo, i 50 
 
 Thomson, G. Modern Sanitary Engineering i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Thomson, G. S. Milk and Cream Testing i2mo, *2 25 
 
 Modern Sanitary Engineering, House Drainage, etc Svo, *3 oo 
 
 Thornley, T. Cotton Combing Machines.... Svo, *3 50 
 
 Cotton Waste Svo, *3 50 
 
 Cotton Spinning. Svo. 
 
 First Year *i 50 
 
 Second Year *3 50 
 
 Third Year *2 50 
 
 Thurso, J. W. Modern Turbine Practice Svo, *4 oo 
 
 Tidy, C. Meymott. Treatment of Sewage. (Science Series No. 94.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 Tillmans, J. Water Purification and Sewage Disposal. Trans, by 
 
 Hugh S. Taylor Svo, *? oo 
 
 Tinney, W. H. Gold-mining Machinery Svo, *3 oo 
 
 Titherley, A. W. Laboratory Course of Organic Chemistry Svo, *2 oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 29 
 
 Tizard, H. T. Indicators , (In Press.) 
 
 Toch, M. Chemistry and Technology of Paints 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Materials for Permanent Painting i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Tod, J., and McGibbon, W. C. Marine Engineers' Board of Trade 
 
 Examinations 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Todd, J., and Whall, W. B. Practical Seamanship 8Vo, 8 oo 
 
 Tonge, J, Coal. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Townsend, F. Alternating Current Engineering 8vo, boards, *o 75 
 
 Townsend, J. S. lonization of Gases by Collision 8vo, *i 25 
 
 Transactions of the American Institute of Chemical Engineers, 8vo. 
 
 Vol. I. to X., 19118-1917 8vo, each, 6 oo 
 
 Traverse Tables. (Science Series No. 1 15.) i6mo, 75 
 
 morocco, oo 
 
 Treiber, E. Foundry Machinery. Trans, by C. Salter i2mo, oo 
 
 Trinks, W., and Housum, C. Shaft Governors. (Science Series No. 122.) 
 
 i6mo, 75 
 
 Trowbridge, W. P. Turbine Wheels. (Science Series No. 44.) .. i6mo, 75 
 
 Tucker, J. H. A Manual of Sugar Analysis 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Tunner, P. A. Treatise on Roll-turning. Trans, by J. B. Pearse. 
 
 8vo, text and folio atlas, 10 oo 
 Turnbull, Jr., J., and Robinson, S. W A Treatise on the Compound 
 
 Steam-engine. (Science Ser'es No. 8.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Turner, H. Worsted Spinners' Handbook i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Turrill, S. M. Elementary Course in Perspective 12 mo, *r 25 
 
 Twyford, H. B. Purchasing 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Storing, Its Economic Aspects and Proper Methods 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Underbill, C. R. Solenoids, Electromagnets and Electromagnetic Wind- 
 ings i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Underwood, N., and Sullivan, T. V. Chemistry and Technology of 
 
 Printing Inks 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Urquhart, J. W. Electro-plating i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Electrotyping i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Usborne, P. O. G. Design of Simple Steel Bridges 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Vacher, F. Food Inspector's Handbook i2mo, 
 
 Van Nostrand's Chemical Annual. Fourth issue igiS.fabrikoid, i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Year Book of Mechanical Engineering Data (In Press.) 
 
 Van Wagenen, T. F. Manual of Hydraulic Mining i6mo, i oo 
 
 Vega, Baron Von. Logarithmic Tables 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Vincent, C. Ammonia and its Compounds. Trans, by M. J. Salte: 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Volk, C. Haulage and Winding; Appliances 8vo, *4 
 
 Von Georeievics, G. Chemical Techno1o<ry of Textile Fibres. Trains. 
 
 by C. Salter 8vo, 
 
 - Chemistry of Dyestuffs. Trans bv C. S"Her 8vo. 
 
 (New Edition in Preparation.} 
 Vose, G. L. Graphic Method for Solving Certain Questions in Arithmetic 
 
 and Algebra. (Science Series No. 16.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Vosmaer, A. Ozone 8vo, *2 50
 
 30 D- VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 
 
 Wabner, R. Ventilation in Mines. Trans, by C. Salter 8vo, *s oo 
 
 Wade, E. J. Secondary Batteries 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Wadmore, T. M. Elementary Chemical Theory i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Wagner, E. Preserving Fruits, Vegetables, and Meat izmo, *2 50 
 
 Wagner, J. B. A Treatise on the Natural and Artificial Processes of 
 
 Wood Seasoning 8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Waldram, P. J. Principles of Structural Mechanics i2mo, *3 oo 
 
 Walker, F. Dynamo Building. (Science Series No. 98.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Walker, J. Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Walker, S. F. Steam Boilers, Engines and Turbines 8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Refrigeration, Heating and Ventilation on Shipboard i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Electricity in Mining 8vo, *4 50 
 
 Electric Wiring and Fitting 8vo, 250 
 
 Wallis-Tayler, A. J. Bearings and Lubrication 8vo, *z 50 
 
 Aerial or Wire Ropeways 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Preservation of Wood 8vo, 4 oo 
 
 Refrigeration, Cold Storage and Ice Making 8vo, 5 50 
 
 Sugar Machinery i2mo, *z 50 
 
 Walsh, J. J. Chemistry and Physics of Mining and Mine Ventilation, 
 
 I2H10, *2 OO 
 
 Wanklyn, J. A. Water Analysis i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 Wansbrough, W. D. The A B C of the Differential Calculus i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Slide Valves i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Waring, Jr., G. E. Sanitary Conditions. (Science Series No. 3i.).i6mo, o 75 
 
 Sewerage and Land Drainage *6 oo 
 
 Modern Methods of Sewage Disposal i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 How to Drain a House 12010, i 25 
 
 Warnes, A. R. Coal Tar Distillation 8vo, *$ oo 
 
 Warren, F. D. Handbook on Reinforced Concrete i2mo, *2 50 
 
 Watkins, A. Photography. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Watson, E. P. Small Engines and Boilers i2mo, i 25 
 
 Watt, A. Electro-plating and Electro-refining of Metals 8vo, *4 50 
 
 Electro-metallurgy i2mo, i oo 
 
 The Art of Soap Making 8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Leather Manufacture 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Paper-Making 8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Webb, H. L. Guide to the Testing of Insulated Wires and Cables. i2mo, i oo 
 
 Webber, W. H. Y. Town Gas. (Westminster Series.) 8vo, *z oo 
 
 Wegmann, Edward. Conveyance and Distribution of Water for 
 
 Water Supply 8vo, 5 oo 
 
 Weisbach, J. A Manual of Theoretical Mechanics 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 sheep, *7 50 
 
 Weisbach, J., and Herrmann, G. Mechanics of Air Machinery 8vo, *3 75 
 
 Wells, M. B. Steel Bridge Designing 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Wells, Robt. Ornamental Confectionery i2mo, 3. oo 
 
 Weston, E. B. Loss of Head Due to Friction of Water in Pipes, .izmo, *i 50 
 
 Wheatley, 0. Ornamental Cement Work 8vo, *2 25 
 
 Whipple, S. An Elementary and Practical Treatise on Bridge Building. 
 
 8vo, 3 oo 
 White, C. H. Methods of Metallurgical Analysis. (Van Nostrand's 
 
 Textbooks.) i2mo, 250
 
 D, VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 31 
 
 White, G. F. Qualitative Chemical Analysis i2mo, *i 25 
 
 White, G. T. xootned rearing i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 White, H. J. Oil Tank Steamers 12010, i 50 
 
 Whitelaw, John. Surveying 8vo, 4 50 
 
 Whittaker, C. M. The Application of the Coal Tar Dyestuffs. . .8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Widmer, E. J. Military Balloons 8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Wilcox, R. M. Cantilever Bridges. (Science Series No. 25.) . . .i6mo, o 75 
 
 Wilda, H. Steam Turbines. Trans, by C. Salter i2mo, 2 oo 
 
 . Cranes and Hoists. Trans, by C. Salter i2mo, *2 oo 
 
 Wilkinson, H. D. Submarine Cable Laying and Repairing 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Williamson, J. Surveying 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Williamson, R. S. On the Use of the Barometer 4to, 15 oo 
 
 . Practical Tables in Meteorology and Hypsometery 4to, 2 50 
 
 Wilson, F. J., and Heilbron, I. M. Chemical Theory and Calculations. 
 
 i2mo, *i 25 
 
 Wilson, J. F. Essentials of Electrical Engineering 8vo, 2 50 
 
 Wimperis, H. E. Internal Combustion Engine 8vo, *s oo 
 
 i Application of Power to Road Transport i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Primer of Internal Combustion Engine i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Winchell, N. H., and A. N. Elements of Optical Mineralogy 8vo, *z 50 
 
 Winslow, A Stadia Surveying. (Science Series No. 77.) i6mo, o 75 
 
 Wisser, Lieut. J. P. Explosive Materials. (Science Series No. 70.) 
 
 i6mo, o 75 
 
 Modern Gun Cotton. (Science Series No. 89.) i6o, o 75 
 
 Wolff, C. E. Modern Locomotive Practice 8vo, *4 20 
 
 Wood, De V. Luminiferous Aether. (Science Series No. 85.)..i6mo, o 75 
 Wood, J. K. Chemistry of Dyeing. (Chemical Monographs No. 2.) 
 
 i2mo, *i oo 
 
 Worden, E. C. The Nitrocellulose Industry. Two Volumes 8vo, *io oo 
 
 Technology of Cellulose Esters. In 10 volumes. 8vo. 
 
 Vol. VIII. Cellulose Acetate *5 oo 
 
 Wren, H. Organometallic Compounds of Zinc and Magnesium. (Chem- 
 ical Monographs No. i.) i2ino, *i oo 
 
 Wright, A. C. Analysis of Oils and Allied Substances 8vo, *3 50 
 
 Simple Method for Testing Painters' Materials 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Wright, F. W. Design of a Condensing Plant i2mo, *i 50 
 
 Wright, H. E. Handy Book for Brewers 8vo, *6 oo 
 
 Wright, J. Testing, Fault Finding, etc., for Wiremen. (Installation 
 
 Manuals Series.) i6mo, *o 50 
 
 Wright, T. W. Elements of Mechanics 8vo, *2 50 
 
 Wright, T. W., and Hayford, J. F. Adjustment of Observations. ..8vo, *3 oo 
 Wynne, W. E., and Sparagen, W. Handbook of Engineering Mathe- 
 matics 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Yoder, J. H., and Wharen, G. B. Locomotive Valves and Valve Gears, 
 
 8vo, *3 oo 
 
 Young, J. E. Electrical Testing for Telegraph Engineers 8vo, *4 oo 
 
 Young, R. B. The Banket 8vo, 3 50 
 
 Youngson. Slide Valve and Valve Gears 8vo, 3 oo 
 
 Zahner, R. Transmission of Power. (Science Series No. 40.)..i6mo, 
 
 Zeidler, J., and Lustgarten, J. Electric Arc Lamps 8vo, *2 oo 
 
 Zeuner, A. Technical Thermodynamics. Trans, by J. F. Klein. Two 
 
 Volumes 8vo, *8 oo 
 
 Zimmer, G. F. Mechanical Handling and Storing of Materials .... 4to, *i2 50 
 Mechanical Handling of Material and Its National Importance 
 
 During and After the War 4to, 4 oo 
 
 Zipser, J. Textile Raw Materials. Trans, by C. Salter 8vo, *5 oo 
 
 Zur Nedden, F. Engineering Workshop Machines and Processes. Trans. 
 
 by J. A. Davenport 8vo, *2 oo
 
 D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY 
 
 are prepared to supply, either from 
 
 their complete stock or at 
 
 short notice, 
 
 Any Technical or 
 
 Scientific Book 
 
 In addition to publishing a very large 
 and varied number of SCIENTIFIC AND 
 ENGINEERING BOOKS D. Van Nostrand 
 Company have on hand the largest 
 assortment in the United States of such 
 books issued by American and foreign 
 publishers. 
 
 All inquiries are cheerfully and care- 
 fully answered and complete catalogs, 
 sent free on request. 
 
 25 PARK PLACE NEW YORK
 
 ' MESA 
 BRANCH 
 
 HOUR 
 
 '711
 
 "555 598 525 
 
 2593.